]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blob - gas/doc/as.texi
Deal with full path in .file 0 directive
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BPF
44 @set BPF
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-<N>}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--gdwarf-cie-version}=@var{VERSION}]
235 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
236 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
238 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
239 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
240 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--generate-missing-build-notes=[no|yes]}]
248 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
249 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
250 @c
251 @c man end
252 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
253 @c Add an empty line for separation.
254 @c man begin TARGET
255 @ifset AARCH64
256
257 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
258 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
259 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
260 @end ifset
261 @ifset ALPHA
262
263 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
264 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
265 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
266 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
267 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
268 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
269 @end ifset
270 @ifset ARC
271
272 @emph{Target ARC options:}
273 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
274 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
275 [@b{-mcode-density}]
276 [@b{-mrelax}]
277 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
278 @end ifset
279 @ifset ARM
280
281 @emph{Target ARM options:}
282 @c Don't document the deprecated options
283 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
285 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
286 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
287 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
288 [@b{-mthumb}]
289 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
290 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
291 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
292 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
293 @end ifset
294 @ifset Blackfin
295
296 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
297 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
298 [@b{-mfdpic}]
299 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
300 [@b{-mnopic}]
301 @end ifset
302 @ifset BPF
303
304 @emph{Target BPF options:}
305 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}]
306 @end ifset
307 @ifset CRIS
308
309 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
310 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
311 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
312 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
313 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
314 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
315 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
316 @end ifset
317 @ifset CSKY
318
319 @emph{Target C-SKY options:}
320 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
321 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-mlittle-endian}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-mbig-endian}]
322 [@b{-fpic}] [@b{-pic}]
323 [@b{-mljump}] [@b{-mno-ljump}]
324 [@b{-force2bsr}] [@b{-mforce2bsr}] [@b{-no-force2bsr}] [@b{-mno-force2bsr}]
325 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-mjsri2bsr}] [@b{-no-jsri2bsr }] [@b{-mno-jsri2bsr}]
326 [@b{-mnolrw }] [@b{-mno-lrw}]
327 [@b{-melrw}] [@b{-mno-elrw}]
328 [@b{-mlaf }] [@b{-mliterals-after-func}]
329 [@b{-mno-laf}] [@b{-mno-literals-after-func}]
330 [@b{-mlabr}] [@b{-mliterals-after-br}]
331 [@b{-mno-labr}] [@b{-mnoliterals-after-br}]
332 [@b{-mistack}] [@b{-mno-istack}]
333 [@b{-mhard-float}] [@b{-mmp}] [@b{-mcp}] [@b{-mcache}]
334 [@b{-msecurity}] [@b{-mtrust}]
335 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-medsp}] [@b{-mvdsp}]
336 @end ifset
337 @ifset D10V
338
339 @emph{Target D10V options:}
340 [@b{-O}]
341 @end ifset
342 @ifset D30V
343
344 @emph{Target D30V options:}
345 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
346 @end ifset
347 @ifset EPIPHANY
348
349 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
350 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
351 @end ifset
352 @ifset H8
353
354 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
355 [-h-tick-hex]
356 @end ifset
357 @ifset HPPA
358 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
359 @end ifset
360 @ifset I80386
361
362 @emph{Target i386 options:}
363 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
364 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
365 @end ifset
366 @ifset IA64
367
368 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
369 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
370 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
371 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
372 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
373 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
374 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
375 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
376 @end ifset
377 @ifset IP2K
378
379 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
380 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
381 @end ifset
382 @ifset LOONGARCH
383
384 @emph{Target LOONGARCH options:}
385 [@b{-fpic}|@b{-fPIC}|@b{-fno-pic}]
386 @end ifset
387 @ifset M32C
388
389 @emph{Target M32C options:}
390 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
391 @end ifset
392 @ifset M32R
393
394 @emph{Target M32R options:}
395 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
396 @b{--W[n]p}]
397 @end ifset
398 @ifset M680X0
399
400 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
401 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
402 @end ifset
403 @ifset M68HC11
404
405 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
406 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
407 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
408 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
409 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
410 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
411 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
412 @end ifset
413 @ifset MCORE
414
415 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
416 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
417 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
418 @end ifset
419 @ifset METAG
420
421 @emph{Target Meta options:}
422 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
423 @end ifset
424 @ifset MICROBLAZE
425 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
426 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
427 @end ifset
428 @ifset MIPS
429
430 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
431 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
432 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
433 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
434 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
435 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
436 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
437 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
438 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
439 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
440 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
441 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
442 [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
443 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
444 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
445 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
446 [@b{-mmips16e2}] [@b{-mno-mips16e2}]
447 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
448 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
449 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
450 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
451 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
452 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
453 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
454 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
455 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
456 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
457 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
458 [@b{-mcrc}] [@b{-mno-crc}]
459 [@b{-mginv}] [@b{-mno-ginv}]
460 [@b{-mloongson-mmi}] [@b{-mno-loongson-mmi}]
461 [@b{-mloongson-cam}] [@b{-mno-loongson-cam}]
462 [@b{-mloongson-ext}] [@b{-mno-loongson-ext}]
463 [@b{-mloongson-ext2}] [@b{-mno-loongson-ext2}]
464 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
465 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
466 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
467 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
468 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
469 [@b{-mfix-r5900}] [@b{-mno-fix-r5900}]
470 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
471 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
472 @end ifset
473 @ifset MMIX
474
475 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
476 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
477 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
478 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
479 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
480 @end ifset
481 @ifset NIOSII
482
483 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
484 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
485 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
486 @end ifset
487 @ifset NDS32
488
489 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
490 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
491 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
492 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
493 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
494 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
495 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
496 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
497 [@b{-mb2bb}]
498 @end ifset
499 @ifset OPENRISC
500 @c OpenRISC has no machine-dependent assembler options.
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset PDP11
503
504 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
505 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
506 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
507 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset PJ
510
511 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
512 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
513 @end ifset
514 @ifset PPC
515
516 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
517 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
518 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
519 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mgekko}|
520 @b{-mbroadway}|@b{-mppc64}|@b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|
521 @b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|@b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|
522 @b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|@b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
523 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mspe2}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
524 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
525 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
526 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
527 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
528 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
529 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
530 @end ifset
531 @ifset PRU
532
533 @emph{Target PRU options:}
534 [@b{-link-relax}]
535 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
536 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
537 @end ifset
538 @ifset RISCV
539
540 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
541 [@b{-fpic}|@b{-fPIC}|@b{-fno-pic}]
542 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
543 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
544 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
545 @end ifset
546 @ifset RL78
547
548 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
549 [@b{-mg10}]
550 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
551 @end ifset
552 @ifset RX
553
554 @emph{Target RX options:}
555 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
556 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
557 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
558 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
559 [@b{-mpid}]
560 [@b{-mrelax}]
561 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
562 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
563 @end ifset
564 @ifset S390
565
566 @emph{Target s390 options:}
567 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
568 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
569 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
570 @end ifset
571 @ifset SCORE
572
573 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
574 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
575 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
576 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
577 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
578 @end ifset
579 @ifset SPARC
580
581 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
582 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
583 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
584 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
585 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
586 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
587 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
588 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
589 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
590 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
591 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
592 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
593 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
594 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
595 @b{-bump}]
596 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
597 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
598 @end ifset
599 @ifset TIC54X
600
601 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
602 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
603 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
604 @end ifset
605 @ifset TIC6X
606
607 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
608 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
609 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
610 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
611 @end ifset
612 @ifset TILEGX
613
614 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
615 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
616 @end ifset
617 @ifset TILEPRO
618 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
619 @end ifset
620 @ifset VISIUM
621
622 @emph{Target Visium options:}
623 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
624 @end ifset
625 @ifset XTENSA
626
627 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
628 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
629 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
630 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
631 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
632 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
633 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
634 [@b{--abi-windowed}|@b{--abi-call0}]
635 @end ifset
636 @ifset Z80
637
638 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
639 [@b{-march=@var{CPU}@var{[-EXT]}@var{[+EXT]}}]
640 [@b{-local-prefix=}@var{PREFIX}]
641 [@b{-colonless}]
642 [@b{-sdcc}]
643 [@b{-fp-s=}@var{FORMAT}]
644 [@b{-fp-d=}@var{FORMAT}]
645 @end ifset
646 @ifset Z8000
647
648 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
649 @end ifset
650
651 @c man end
652 @end smallexample
653
654 @c man begin OPTIONS
655
656 @table @gcctabopt
657 @include at-file.texi
658
659 @item -a[cdghlmns]
660 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
661
662 @table @gcctabopt
663 @item -ac
664 omit false conditionals
665
666 @item -ad
667 omit debugging directives
668
669 @item -ag
670 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
671
672 @item -ah
673 include high-level source
674
675 @item -al
676 include assembly
677
678 @item -am
679 include macro expansions
680
681 @item -an
682 omit forms processing
683
684 @item -as
685 include symbols
686
687 @item =file
688 set the name of the listing file
689 @end table
690
691 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
692 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
693 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
694
695 @item --alternate
696 Begin in alternate macro mode.
697 @ifclear man
698 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
699 @end ifclear
700
701 @item --compress-debug-sections
702 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
703 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
704 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
705 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
706
707 @ifset ELF
708 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
709 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
710 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
711 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
712 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
713 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
714 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
715 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
716 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
717 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
718 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
719 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
720 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
721 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
722 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
723
724 @end ifset
725
726 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
727 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
728 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
729 override this.
730
731 @item -D
732 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
733 other assemblers.
734
735 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
736 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
737 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
738
739 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
740 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
741 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
742 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
743 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
744 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
745
746 @item -f
747 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
748 compiler output).
749
750 @item -g
751 @itemx --gen-debug
752 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
753 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
754 ECOFF or DWARF2. When the debug format is DWARF then a @code{.debug_info} and
755 @code{.debug_line} section is only emitted when the assembly file doesn't
756 generate one itself.
757
758 @item --gstabs
759 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
760 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
761
762 @item --gstabs+
763 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
764 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
765 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
766 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
767 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
768
769 @item --gdwarf-2
770 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
771 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
772 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
773
774 @item --gdwarf-3
775 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
776 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
777 version 3 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
778 guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a
779 per target basis.
780
781 @item --gdwarf-4
782 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
783 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
784 version 4 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
785 guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a
786 per target basis.
787
788 @item --gdwarf-5
789 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
790 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
791 version 5 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
792 guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a
793 per target basis.
794
795 @item --gdwarf-sections
796 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
797 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
798 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
799 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
800 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
801 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
802 suffix.
803
804 @item --gdwarf-cie-version=@var{version}
805 Control which version of DWARF Common Information Entries (CIEs) are produced.
806 When this flag is not specificed the default is version 1, though some targets
807 can modify this default. Other possible values for @var{version} are 3 or 4.
808
809 @ifset ELF
810 @item --size-check=error
811 @itemx --size-check=warning
812 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
813
814 @item --elf-stt-common=no
815 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
816 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
817 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
818 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
819
820 @item --generate-missing-build-notes=yes
821 @itemx --generate-missing-build-notes=no
822 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate GNU Build
823 attribute notes if none are present in the input sources.
824 The default can be controlled by the @option{--enable-generate-build-notes}
825 configure option.
826
827 @end ifset
828
829 @item --help
830 Print a summary of the command-line options and exit.
831
832 @item --target-help
833 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
834
835 @item -I @var{dir}
836 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
837
838 @item -J
839 Don't warn about signed overflow.
840
841 @item -K
842 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
843 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
844 @end ifclear
845 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
846 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
847 @end ifset
848
849 @item -L
850 @itemx --keep-locals
851 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
852 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
853 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
854 @ifclear man
855 @xref{Symbol Names}.
856 @end ifclear
857
858 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
859 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
860 listing to @var{number}.
861
862 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
863 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
864 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
865
866 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
867 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
868 @var{number} bytes.
869
870 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
871 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
872 to @var{number} + 1.
873
874 @item --no-pad-sections
875 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
876 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
877 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
878
879 @item -o @var{objfile}
880 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
881
882 @item -R
883 Fold the data section into the text section.
884
885 @ifset ELF
886 @item --sectname-subst
887 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
888 @ifclear man
889 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
890 @end ifclear
891 @end ifset
892
893 @item --statistics
894 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
895 assembly.
896
897 @item --strip-local-absolute
898 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
899
900 @item -v
901 @itemx -version
902 Print the @command{as} version.
903
904 @item --version
905 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
906
907 @item -W
908 @itemx --no-warn
909 Suppress warning messages.
910
911 @item --fatal-warnings
912 Treat warnings as errors.
913
914 @item --warn
915 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
916
917 @item -w
918 Ignored.
919
920 @item -x
921 Ignored.
922
923 @item -Z
924 Generate an object file even after errors.
925
926 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
927 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
928
929 @end table
930 @c man end
931
932 @ifset AARCH64
933
934 @ifclear man
935 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
936 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
937 @end ifclear
938
939 @ifset man
940 @c man begin OPTIONS
941 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
942 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
943 @c man end
944 @c man begin INCLUDE
945 @include c-aarch64.texi
946 @c ended inside the included file
947 @end ifset
948
949 @end ifset
950
951 @ifset ALPHA
952
953 @ifclear man
954 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
955 for an Alpha processor.
956 @end ifclear
957
958 @ifset man
959 @c man begin OPTIONS
960 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
961 processor.
962 @c man end
963 @c man begin INCLUDE
964 @include c-alpha.texi
965 @c ended inside the included file
966 @end ifset
967
968 @end ifset
969
970 @c man begin OPTIONS
971 @ifset ARC
972 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
973 processor.
974
975 @table @gcctabopt
976 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
977 This option selects the core processor variant.
978 @item -EB | -EL
979 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
980 @item -mcode-density
981 Enable Code Density extension instructions.
982 @end table
983 @end ifset
984
985 @ifset ARM
986 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
987 processor family.
988
989 @table @gcctabopt
990 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
991 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
992 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
993 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
994 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
995 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
996 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
997 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
998 @item -mthumb
999 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
1000 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
1001 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
1002 @item -EB | -EL
1003 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
1004 @item -mthumb-interwork
1005 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
1006 ARM code in mind.
1007 @item -mccs
1008 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
1009 @item -k
1010 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
1011 @end table
1012 @end ifset
1013 @c man end
1014
1015 @ifset Blackfin
1016
1017 @ifclear man
1018 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1019 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
1020 @end ifclear
1021
1022 @ifset man
1023 @c man begin OPTIONS
1024 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1025 the Blackfin processor family.
1026 @c man end
1027 @c man begin INCLUDE
1028 @include c-bfin.texi
1029 @c ended inside the included file
1030 @end ifset
1031
1032 @end ifset
1033
1034 @ifset BPF
1035
1036 @ifclear man
1037 @xref{BPF Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1038 configured for the Linux kernel BPF processor family.
1039 @end ifclear
1040
1041 @ifset man
1042 @c man begin OPTIONS
1043 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1044 the Linux kernel BPF processor family.
1045 @c man end
1046 @c man begin INCLUDE
1047 @include c-bpf.texi
1048 @c ended inside the included file
1049 @end ifset
1050
1051 @end ifset
1052
1053 @c man begin OPTIONS
1054 @ifset CRIS
1055 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
1056 @end ifset
1057
1058 @ifset CSKY
1059
1060 @ifclear man
1061 @xref{C-SKY Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1062 configured for the C-SKY processor family.
1063 @end ifclear
1064
1065 @ifset man
1066 @c man begin OPTIONS
1067 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1068 the C-SKY processor family.
1069 @c man end
1070 @c man begin INCLUDE
1071 @include c-csky.texi
1072 @c ended inside the included file
1073 @end ifset
1074
1075 @end ifset
1076
1077 @ifset D10V
1078 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1079 a D10V processor.
1080 @table @gcctabopt
1081 @cindex D10V optimization
1082 @cindex optimization, D10V
1083 @item -O
1084 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1085 @end table
1086 @end ifset
1087
1088 @ifset D30V
1089 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
1090 processor.
1091 @table @gcctabopt
1092 @cindex D30V optimization
1093 @cindex optimization, D30V
1094 @item -O
1095 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1096
1097 @cindex D30V nops
1098 @item -n
1099 Warn when nops are generated.
1100
1101 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1102 @item -N
1103 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1104 @end table
1105 @end ifset
1106 @c man end
1107
1108 @ifset EPIPHANY
1109 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1110 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1111
1112 @ifclear man
1113 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1114 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1115 @end ifclear
1116
1117 @ifset man
1118 @c man begin OPTIONS
1119 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1120 an Epiphany processor.
1121 @c man end
1122 @c man begin INCLUDE
1123 @include c-epiphany.texi
1124 @c ended inside the included file
1125 @end ifset
1126
1127 @end ifset
1128
1129 @ifset H8300
1130
1131 @ifclear man
1132 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1133 for an H8/300 processor.
1134 @end ifclear
1135
1136 @ifset man
1137 @c man begin OPTIONS
1138 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1139 processor.
1140 @c man end
1141 @c man begin INCLUDE
1142 @include c-h8300.texi
1143 @c ended inside the included file
1144 @end ifset
1145
1146 @end ifset
1147
1148 @ifset I80386
1149
1150 @ifclear man
1151 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1152 configured for an i386 processor.
1153 @end ifclear
1154
1155 @ifset man
1156 @c man begin OPTIONS
1157 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1158 an i386 processor.
1159 @c man end
1160 @c man begin INCLUDE
1161 @include c-i386.texi
1162 @c ended inside the included file
1163 @end ifset
1164
1165 @end ifset
1166
1167 @c man begin OPTIONS
1168 @ifset IP2K
1169 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1170 Ubicom IP2K series.
1171
1172 @table @gcctabopt
1173
1174 @item -mip2022ext
1175 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1176
1177 @item -mip2022
1178 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1179 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1180
1181 @end table
1182 @end ifset
1183
1184 @ifset M32C
1185 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1186 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1187
1188 @table @gcctabopt
1189
1190 @item -m32c
1191 Assemble M32C instructions.
1192
1193 @item -m16c
1194 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1195
1196 @item -relax
1197 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1198
1199 @item -h-tick-hex
1200 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1201
1202 @end table
1203 @end ifset
1204
1205 @ifset M32R
1206 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1207 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1208
1209 @table @gcctabopt
1210
1211 @item --m32rx
1212 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1213 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1214
1215 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1216 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1217 encountered.
1218
1219 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1220 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1221 encountered.
1222
1223 @end table
1224 @end ifset
1225
1226 @ifset M680X0
1227 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1228 Motorola 68000 series.
1229
1230 @table @gcctabopt
1231
1232 @item -l
1233 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1234
1235 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1236 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1237 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1238 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1239 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1240
1241 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1242 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1243 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1244 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1245 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1246 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1247
1248 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1249 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1250 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1251
1252 @end table
1253 @end ifset
1254
1255 @ifset NIOSII
1256
1257 @ifclear man
1258 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1259 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1260 @end ifclear
1261
1262 @ifset man
1263 @c man begin OPTIONS
1264 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1265 Altera Nios II processor.
1266 @c man end
1267 @c man begin INCLUDE
1268 @include c-nios2.texi
1269 @c ended inside the included file
1270 @end ifset
1271 @end ifset
1272
1273 @ifset PDP11
1274
1275 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1276 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1277
1278 @table @gcctabopt
1279 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1280 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1281 default is @option{-mpic}.
1282
1283 @item -mall
1284 @itemx -mall-extensions
1285 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1286
1287 @item -mno-extensions
1288 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1289
1290 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1291 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1292
1293 @item -m@var{cpu}
1294 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1295 disable all other extensions.
1296
1297 @item -m@var{machine}
1298 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1299 model, and disable all other extensions.
1300 @end table
1301
1302 @end ifset
1303
1304 @ifset PJ
1305 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1306 a picoJava processor.
1307
1308 @table @gcctabopt
1309
1310 @cindex PJ endianness
1311 @cindex endianness, PJ
1312 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1313 @item -mb
1314 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1315
1316 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1317 @item -ml
1318 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1319
1320 @end table
1321 @end ifset
1322
1323 @ifset PRU
1324
1325 @ifclear man
1326 @xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1327 for a PRU processor.
1328 @end ifclear
1329
1330 @ifset man
1331 @c man begin OPTIONS
1332 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1333 PRU processor.
1334 @c man end
1335 @c man begin INCLUDE
1336 @include c-pru.texi
1337 @c ended inside the included file
1338 @end ifset
1339 @end ifset
1340
1341 @ifset M68HC11
1342 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1343 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1344
1345 @table @gcctabopt
1346
1347 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1348 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1349 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1350
1351 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1352 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1353 XGATE address space.
1354
1355 @item -mshort
1356 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1357
1358 @item -mlong
1359 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1360
1361 @item -mshort-double
1362 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1363
1364 @item -mlong-double
1365 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1366
1367 @item --force-long-branches
1368 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1369 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1370 sub routine.
1371
1372 @item -S | --short-branches
1373 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1374 when the offset is out of range.
1375
1376 @item --strict-direct-mode
1377 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1378 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1379
1380 @item --print-insn-syntax
1381 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1382
1383 @item --print-opcodes
1384 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1385
1386 @item --generate-example
1387 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1388 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1389
1390 @end table
1391 @end ifset
1392
1393 @ifset SPARC
1394 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1395 for the SPARC architecture:
1396
1397 @table @gcctabopt
1398 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1399 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1400 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1401
1402 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1403 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1404
1405 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1406 UltraSPARC extensions.
1407
1408 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1409 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1410 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1411
1412 @item -bump
1413 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1414 @end table
1415 @end ifset
1416
1417 @ifset TIC54X
1418 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1419 architecture.
1420
1421 @table @gcctabopt
1422 @item -mfar-mode
1423 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1424 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1425 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1426 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1427 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1428 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1429 behaviour in the shell.
1430 @end table
1431 @end ifset
1432
1433 @ifset MIPS
1434 @c man begin OPTIONS
1435 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1436 a MIPS processor.
1437
1438 @table @gcctabopt
1439 @item -G @var{num}
1440 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1441 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1442 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1443
1444 @cindex MIPS endianness
1445 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1446 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1447 @item -EB
1448 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1449
1450 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1451 @item -EL
1452 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1453
1454 @cindex MIPS ISA
1455 @item -mips1
1456 @itemx -mips2
1457 @itemx -mips3
1458 @itemx -mips4
1459 @itemx -mips5
1460 @itemx -mips32
1461 @itemx -mips32r2
1462 @itemx -mips32r3
1463 @itemx -mips32r5
1464 @itemx -mips32r6
1465 @itemx -mips64
1466 @itemx -mips64r2
1467 @itemx -mips64r3
1468 @itemx -mips64r5
1469 @itemx -mips64r6
1470 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1471 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1472 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1473 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1474 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1475 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1476 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1477 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1478 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1479 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1480
1481 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1482 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1483
1484 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1485 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1486
1487 @item -mfix7000
1488 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1489 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1490 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1491
1492 @item -mfix-rm7000
1493 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1494 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1495 followed by a load instruction.
1496
1497 @item -mfix-r5900
1498 @itemx -mno-fix-r5900
1499 Do not attempt to schedule the preceding instruction into the delay slot
1500 of a branch instruction placed at the end of a short loop of six
1501 instructions or fewer and always schedule a @code{nop} instruction there
1502 instead. The short loop bug under certain conditions causes loops to
1503 execute only once or twice, due to a hardware bug in the R5900 chip.
1504
1505 @item -mdebug
1506 @itemx -no-mdebug
1507 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1508 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1509
1510 @item -mpdr
1511 @itemx -mno-pdr
1512 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1513
1514 @item -mgp32
1515 @itemx -mfp32
1516 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1517 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1518 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1519 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1520
1521 @item -mgp64
1522 @itemx -mfp64
1523 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1524 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1525 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1526 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1527
1528 @item -mfpxx
1529 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1530 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1531 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1532 32 or 64 bits wide.
1533
1534 @item -modd-spreg
1535 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1536 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1537 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1538 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1539
1540 @item -mips16
1541 @itemx -no-mips16
1542 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1543 @code{.module mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1544 turns off this option.
1545
1546 @item -mmips16e2
1547 @itemx -mno-mips16e2
1548 Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode. This is equivalent
1549 to putting @code{.module mips16e2} at the start of the assembly file.
1550 @samp{-mno-mips16e2} turns off this option.
1551
1552 @item -mmicromips
1553 @itemx -mno-micromips
1554 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1555 @code{.module micromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1556 @samp{-mno-micromips} turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting
1557 @code{.module nomicromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1558
1559 @item -msmartmips
1560 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1561 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1562 equivalent to putting @code{.module smartmips} at the start of the assembly
1563 file. @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1564
1565 @item -mips3d
1566 @itemx -no-mips3d
1567 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1568 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1569 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1570
1571 @item -mdmx
1572 @itemx -no-mdmx
1573 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1574 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1575 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1576
1577 @item -mdsp
1578 @itemx -mno-dsp
1579 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1580 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1581 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1582
1583 @item -mdspr2
1584 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1585 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1586 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1587 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1588 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1589
1590 @item -mdspr3
1591 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1592 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1593 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1594 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1595 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1596
1597 @item -mmsa
1598 @itemx -mno-msa
1599 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1600 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1601 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1602
1603 @item -mxpa
1604 @itemx -mno-xpa
1605 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1606 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1607 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1608
1609 @item -mmt
1610 @itemx -mno-mt
1611 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1612 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1613 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1614
1615 @item -mmcu
1616 @itemx -mno-mcu
1617 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1618 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1619 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1620
1621 @item -mcrc
1622 @itemx -mno-crc
1623 Generate code for the MIPS cyclic redundancy check (CRC) Application
1624 Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept CRC instructions.
1625 @samp{-mno-crc} turns off this option.
1626
1627 @item -mginv
1628 @itemx -mno-ginv
1629 Generate code for the Global INValidate (GINV) Application Specific
1630 Extension. This tells the assembler to accept GINV instructions.
1631 @samp{-mno-ginv} turns off this option.
1632
1633 @item -mloongson-mmi
1634 @itemx -mno-loongson-mmi
1635 Generate code for the Loongson MultiMedia extensions Instructions (MMI)
1636 Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MMI
1637 instructions.
1638 @samp{-mno-loongson-mmi} turns off this option.
1639
1640 @item -mloongson-cam
1641 @itemx -mno-loongson-cam
1642 Generate code for the Loongson Content Address Memory (CAM) instructions.
1643 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson CAM instructions.
1644 @samp{-mno-loongson-cam} turns off this option.
1645
1646 @item -mloongson-ext
1647 @itemx -mno-loongson-ext
1648 Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions (EXT) instructions.
1649 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT instructions.
1650 @samp{-mno-loongson-ext} turns off this option.
1651
1652 @item -mloongson-ext2
1653 @itemx -mno-loongson-ext2
1654 Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions R2 (EXT2) instructions.
1655 This option implies @samp{-mloongson-ext}.
1656 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT2 instructions.
1657 @samp{-mno-loongson-ext2} turns off this option.
1658
1659 @item -minsn32
1660 @itemx -mno-insn32
1661 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1662 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1663 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1664 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1665 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1666 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1667 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1668
1669 @item --construct-floats
1670 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1671 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1672 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1673 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1674 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1675 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1676
1677 @item --relax-branch
1678 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1679 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1680 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1681 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1682
1683 @item -mignore-branch-isa
1684 @itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
1685 Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes. The
1686 semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
1687 most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
1688 same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label. Therefore GAS has
1689 checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
1690 modes match. @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks. By
1691 default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
1692 branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
1693
1694 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1695 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1696 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1697
1698 @cindex emulation
1699 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1700 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1701 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1702 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1703 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1704
1705 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1706 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1707 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1708 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1709 preferred options instead.
1710
1711 @item -nocpp
1712 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1713 the native tools.
1714
1715 @item --trap
1716 @itemx --no-trap
1717 @itemx --break
1718 @itemx --no-break
1719 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1720 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1721 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1722 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1723 break exception.
1724
1725 @item -n
1726 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1727 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1728 @end table
1729 @c man end
1730 @end ifset
1731
1732 @ifset MCORE
1733 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1734 an MCore processor.
1735
1736 @table @gcctabopt
1737 @item -jsri2bsr
1738 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1739 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1740 The command-line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1741
1742 @item -sifilter
1743 @itemx -nosifilter
1744 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1745 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command-line option.
1746
1747 @item -relax
1748 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1749
1750 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1751 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1752 can be assembled.
1753
1754 @item -EB
1755 Assemble for a big endian target.
1756
1757 @item -EL
1758 Assemble for a little endian target.
1759
1760 @end table
1761 @end ifset
1762 @c man end
1763
1764 @ifset LOONGARCH
1765
1766 @ifclear man
1767 @xref{LoongArch-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1768 for a LoongArch processor.
1769 @end ifclear
1770
1771 @ifset man
1772 @c man begin OPTIONS
1773 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1774 LoongArch processor.
1775 @c man end
1776 @c man begin INCLUDE
1777 @include c-loongarch.texi
1778 @c ended inside the included file
1779 @end ifset
1780
1781 @end ifset
1782
1783 @ifset METAG
1784
1785 @ifclear man
1786 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1787 for a Meta processor.
1788 @end ifclear
1789
1790 @ifset man
1791 @c man begin OPTIONS
1792 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1793 Meta processor.
1794 @c man end
1795 @c man begin INCLUDE
1796 @include c-metag.texi
1797 @c ended inside the included file
1798 @end ifset
1799
1800 @end ifset
1801
1802 @c man begin OPTIONS
1803 @ifset MMIX
1804 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1805 @end ifset
1806
1807 @ifset NDS32
1808
1809 @ifclear man
1810 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1811 for a NDS32 processor.
1812 @end ifclear
1813 @c ended inside the included file
1814 @end ifset
1815
1816 @ifset man
1817 @c man begin OPTIONS
1818 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1819 NDS32 processor.
1820 @c man end
1821 @c man begin INCLUDE
1822 @include c-nds32.texi
1823 @c ended inside the included file
1824 @end ifset
1825
1826 @c man end
1827 @ifset PPC
1828
1829 @ifclear man
1830 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1831 for a PowerPC processor.
1832 @end ifclear
1833
1834 @ifset man
1835 @c man begin OPTIONS
1836 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1837 PowerPC processor.
1838 @c man end
1839 @c man begin INCLUDE
1840 @include c-ppc.texi
1841 @c ended inside the included file
1842 @end ifset
1843
1844 @end ifset
1845
1846 @ifset RISCV
1847
1848 @ifclear man
1849 @xref{RISC-V-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1850 for a RISC-V processor.
1851 @end ifclear
1852
1853 @ifset man
1854 @c man begin OPTIONS
1855 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1856 RISC-V processor.
1857 @c man end
1858 @c man begin INCLUDE
1859 @include c-riscv.texi
1860 @c ended inside the included file
1861 @end ifset
1862
1863 @end ifset
1864
1865 @c man begin OPTIONS
1866 @ifset RX
1867 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1868 @end ifset
1869
1870 @ifset S390
1871 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1872 processor family.
1873
1874 @table @gcctabopt
1875 @item -m31
1876 @itemx -m64
1877 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1878 @item -mesa
1879 @item -mzarch
1880 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1881 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1882 @item -march=@var{processor}
1883 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1884 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1885 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1886 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1887 @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), @samp{z14} (or @samp{arch12}), or @samp{z15}
1888 (or @samp{arch13}).
1889 @item -mregnames
1890 @itemx -mno-regnames
1891 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1892 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1893 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1894 but evaluates to zero.
1895 @end table
1896 @end ifset
1897 @c man end
1898
1899 @ifset TIC6X
1900
1901 @ifclear man
1902 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1903 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1904 @end ifclear
1905
1906 @ifset man
1907 @c man begin OPTIONS
1908 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1909 TMS320C6000 processor.
1910 @c man end
1911 @c man begin INCLUDE
1912 @include c-tic6x.texi
1913 @c ended inside the included file
1914 @end ifset
1915
1916 @end ifset
1917
1918 @ifset TILEGX
1919
1920 @ifclear man
1921 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1922 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1923 @end ifclear
1924
1925 @ifset man
1926 @c man begin OPTIONS
1927 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1928 processor.
1929 @c man end
1930 @c man begin INCLUDE
1931 @include c-tilegx.texi
1932 @c ended inside the included file
1933 @end ifset
1934
1935 @end ifset
1936
1937 @ifset VISIUM
1938
1939 @ifclear man
1940 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1941 for a Visium processor.
1942 @end ifclear
1943
1944 @ifset man
1945 @c man begin OPTIONS
1946 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1947 processor.
1948 @c man end
1949 @c man begin INCLUDE
1950 @include c-visium.texi
1951 @c ended inside the included file
1952 @end ifset
1953
1954 @end ifset
1955
1956 @ifset XTENSA
1957
1958 @ifclear man
1959 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1960 for an Xtensa processor.
1961 @end ifclear
1962
1963 @ifset man
1964 @c man begin OPTIONS
1965 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1966 Xtensa processor.
1967 @c man end
1968 @c man begin INCLUDE
1969 @include c-xtensa.texi
1970 @c ended inside the included file
1971 @end ifset
1972
1973 @end ifset
1974
1975 @ifset Z80
1976
1977 @ifclear man
1978 @xref{Z80 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1979 for an Z80 processor.
1980 @end ifclear
1981
1982 @ifset man
1983 @c man begin OPTIONS
1984 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1985 Z80 processor.
1986 @c man end
1987 @c man begin INCLUDE
1988 @include c-z80.texi
1989 @c ended inside the included file
1990 @end ifset
1991
1992 @end ifset
1993
1994 @menu
1995 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1996 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1997 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1998 * Command Line:: Command Line
1999 * Input Files:: Input Files
2000 * Object:: Output (Object) File
2001 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
2002 @end menu
2003
2004 @node Manual
2005 @section Structure of this Manual
2006
2007 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
2008 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
2009 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
2010 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
2011 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
2012
2013 @ifclear GENERIC
2014 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
2015 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
2016 @end ifclear
2017 @ifset GENERIC
2018 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
2019 various flavors of the assembler.
2020 @end ifset
2021
2022 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
2023 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
2024 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
2025 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
2026 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
2027 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
2028 particular architecture.
2029 @ifset GENERIC
2030 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
2031 machine architecture manual for this information.
2032 @end ifset
2033 @ifclear GENERIC
2034 @ifset H8/300
2035 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
2036 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
2037 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
2038 @end ifset
2039 @ifset SH
2040 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
2041 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
2042 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
2043 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
2044 @end ifset
2045 @ifset Z8000
2046 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
2047 @end ifset
2048 @end ifclear
2049
2050 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
2051 @ignore
2052 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
2053 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
2054 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
2055 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
2056 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
2057 qualification.
2058
2059 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
2060 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
2061 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
2062 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
2063 @end ignore
2064
2065 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
2066 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
2067 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
2068 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
2069 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
2070 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
2071 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
2072 @c directives).
2073
2074 @node GNU Assembler
2075 @section The GNU Assembler
2076
2077 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2078
2079 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
2080 @ifclear GENERIC
2081 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
2082 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
2083 @end ifclear
2084 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
2085 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
2086 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
2087 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
2088 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
2089
2090 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
2091 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
2092 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
2093 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
2094 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
2095 machine would assemble.
2096 @ifset VAX
2097 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
2098 @end ifset
2099 @ifset M680X0
2100 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
2101 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
2102 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
2103 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
2104 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
2105 @end ifset
2106
2107 @c man end
2108
2109 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
2110 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
2111 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
2112
2113 @node Object Formats
2114 @section Object File Formats
2115
2116 @cindex object file format
2117 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
2118 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
2119 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
2120 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
2121 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
2122 @ifclear GENERIC
2123 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
2124 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
2125 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
2126 @end ifclear
2127 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
2128 @ifset HPPA
2129 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
2130 SOM or ELF format object files.
2131 @end ifset
2132 @end ifclear
2133
2134 @node Command Line
2135 @section Command Line
2136
2137 @cindex command line conventions
2138
2139 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
2140 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
2141 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
2142 significant.
2143
2144 @cindex standard input, as input file
2145 @kindex --
2146 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
2147 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
2148
2149 @cindex options, command line
2150 Except for @samp{--} any command-line argument that begins with a
2151 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2152 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2153 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2154 the letter is important. All options are optional.
2155
2156 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2157 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2158 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2159 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2160
2161 @smallexample
2162 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2163 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2164 @end smallexample
2165
2166 @node Input Files
2167 @section Input Files
2168
2169 @cindex input
2170 @cindex source program
2171 @cindex files, input
2172 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2173 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2174 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2175 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2176
2177 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2178 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2179 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2180 order specified.
2181
2182 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2183 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2184 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2185 (The standard input is also a file.)
2186
2187 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2188 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2189 command-line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2190 is taken to be an input file name.
2191
2192 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2193 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2194 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2195 to assemble.
2196
2197 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2198 in your command line.
2199
2200 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2201 file.
2202
2203 @c man end
2204
2205 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2206
2207 @cindex input file linenumbers
2208 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2209 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2210 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2211 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2212 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2213
2214 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2215 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2216
2217 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2218 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2219 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2220 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2221 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2222 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2223
2224 @node Object
2225 @section Output (Object) File
2226
2227 @cindex object file
2228 @cindex output file
2229 @kindex a.out
2230 @kindex .o
2231 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2232 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2233 is the object file. Its default name is @code{a.out}.
2234 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2235 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2236 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2237 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2238 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2239
2240 @cindex linker
2241 @kindex ld
2242 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2243 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2244 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2245 information for the debugger.
2246
2247 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2248 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2249
2250 @node Errors
2251 @section Error and Warning Messages
2252
2253 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2254
2255 @cindex error messages
2256 @cindex warning messages
2257 @cindex messages from assembler
2258 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2259 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2260 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2261 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2262 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2263
2264 @c man end
2265
2266 @cindex format of warning messages
2267 Warning messages have the format
2268
2269 @smallexample
2270 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2271 @end smallexample
2272
2273 @noindent
2274 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2275 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2276 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2277 @ifset GENERIC
2278 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2279 @end ifset
2280 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2281 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2282 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2283
2284 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2285 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2286
2287 @smallexample
2288 .file 2 "bar.c"
2289 error_assembler_source
2290 .file "foo.c"
2291 .line 30
2292 error_c_source
2293 @end smallexample
2294
2295 produces this output:
2296
2297 @smallexample
2298 Assembler messages:
2299 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2300 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2301 @end smallexample
2302
2303 @cindex format of error messages
2304 Error messages have the format
2305
2306 @smallexample
2307 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2308 @end smallexample
2309
2310 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2311 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2312 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2313
2314 @node Invoking
2315 @chapter Command-Line Options
2316
2317 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2318 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2319 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2320 for options specific
2321 @ifclear GENERIC
2322 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2323 @end ifclear
2324 @ifset GENERIC
2325 to particular machine architectures.
2326 @end ifset
2327
2328 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2329
2330 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2331 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2332 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2333 by commas. For example:
2334
2335 @smallexample
2336 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2337 @end smallexample
2338
2339 @noindent
2340 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2341 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2342 local symbols in the symbol table).
2343
2344 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2345 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2346 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2347 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2348 assembler.)
2349
2350 @c man end
2351
2352 @menu
2353 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2354 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2355 * D:: -D for compatibility
2356 * f:: -f to work faster
2357 * I:: -I for .include search path
2358 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2359 * K:: -K for compatibility
2360 @end ifclear
2361 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2362 * K:: -K for difference tables
2363 @end ifset
2364
2365 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2366 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2367 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2368 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2369 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2370 * o:: -o to name the object file
2371 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2372 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2373 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2374 * v:: -v to announce version
2375 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2376 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2377 @end menu
2378
2379 @node a
2380 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2381
2382 @kindex -a
2383 @kindex -ac
2384 @kindex -ad
2385 @kindex -ag
2386 @kindex -ah
2387 @kindex -al
2388 @kindex -an
2389 @kindex -as
2390 @cindex listings, enabling
2391 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2392
2393 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2394 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2395 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2396 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2397 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2398 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2399 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2400 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2401 also.
2402
2403 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2404 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2405
2406 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2407 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2408 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2409 omitted from the listing.
2410
2411 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2412 listing.
2413
2414 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2415 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2416 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2417 @code{.sbttl}.
2418 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2419 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2420 listing-control directives have no effect.
2421
2422 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2423 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2424
2425 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2426 because it
2427 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command-line switch
2428 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2429 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2430 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2431 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2432
2433 @node alternate
2434 @section @option{--alternate}
2435
2436 @kindex --alternate
2437 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2438
2439 @node D
2440 @section @option{-D}
2441
2442 @kindex -D
2443 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2444 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2445 @command{@value{AS}}.
2446
2447 @node f
2448 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2449
2450 @kindex -f
2451 @cindex trusted compiler
2452 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2453 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2454 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2455 and comment preprocessing on
2456 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2457 ,Preprocessing}.
2458
2459 @quotation
2460 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2461 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2462 not work correctly.
2463 @end quotation
2464
2465 @node I
2466 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2467
2468 @kindex -I @var{path}
2469 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2470 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2471 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2472 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2473 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2474 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2475 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2476 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2477 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2478 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2479
2480 @node K
2481 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2482
2483 @kindex -K
2484 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2485 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2486 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2487 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2488 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2489 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2490 alteration on other platforms.
2491 @end ifclear
2492
2493 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2494 @cindex difference tables, warning
2495 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2496 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2497 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2498 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2499 is done.
2500 @end ifset
2501
2502 @node L
2503 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2504
2505 @kindex -L
2506 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2507 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2508 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2509 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2510 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2511 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2512 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2513 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2514
2515 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2516 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2517 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2518
2519 @node listing
2520 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2521
2522 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command-line switch
2523 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2524 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2525 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2526 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2527 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2528 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2529 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2530
2531 @table @gcctabopt
2532 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2533 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2534 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2535 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2536 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2537
2538 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2539 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2540 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2541 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2542 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2543 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2544 switch is used the default is to one.
2545
2546 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2547 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2548 @cindex Width of source line output
2549 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2550 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2551 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2552
2553 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2554 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2555 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2556 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2557 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2558 @end table
2559
2560 @node M
2561 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2562
2563 @kindex -M
2564 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2565 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2566 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2567 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} assembler from Microtec Research.
2568 The exact nature of the
2569 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2570 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2571 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2572 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2573
2574 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2575 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2576 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2577 individually. These are:
2578
2579 @itemize @bullet
2580 @item global symbols in common section
2581
2582 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2583 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2584 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2585 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2586 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2587
2588 @item complex relocations
2589
2590 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2591 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2592 are not support by other object file formats.
2593
2594 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2595
2596 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2597 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2598 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2599 script.
2600
2601 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2602
2603 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2604 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2605
2606 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2607
2608 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2609 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2610 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2611 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2612 assigned within a linker script.
2613 @end itemize
2614
2615 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2616 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2617 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2618
2619 @itemize @bullet
2620
2621 @item EBCDIC strings
2622
2623 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2624
2625 @item packed binary coded decimal
2626
2627 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2628 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2629
2630 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2631
2632 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2633
2634 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2635
2636 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2637
2638 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2639
2640 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2641 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2642 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2643 these options serve no purpose.
2644
2645 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2646
2647 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2648 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2649 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2650
2651 @item other @code{OPT} options
2652
2653 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2654 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2655
2656 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2657
2658 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2659 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2660
2661 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2662
2663 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2664
2665 @end itemize
2666
2667 @node MD
2668 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2669
2670 @kindex --MD
2671 @cindex dependency tracking
2672 @cindex make rules
2673
2674 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2675 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2676 dependencies of the main source file.
2677
2678 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2679
2680 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2681
2682 @node no-pad-sections
2683 @section Output Section Padding
2684 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2685 @cindex output section padding
2686 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2687 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2688 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2689 disable this behaviour.
2690
2691 @node o
2692 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2693
2694 @kindex -o
2695 @cindex naming object file
2696 @cindex object file name
2697 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2698 default it has the name @file{a.out}.
2699 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2700 object file a different name.
2701
2702 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2703 existing file of the same name.
2704
2705 @node R
2706 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2707
2708 @kindex -R
2709 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2710 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2711 @cindex joining text and data sections
2712 @cindex merging text and data sections
2713 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2714 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2715 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2716 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2717 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2718 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2719
2720 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2721 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2722 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2723 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2724
2725 @ifset COFF-ELF
2726 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2727 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2728 @samp{.data}.
2729 @end ifset
2730
2731 @ifset HPPA
2732 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2733 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2734 @end ifset
2735
2736 @node statistics
2737 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2738
2739 @kindex --statistics
2740 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2741 @cindex time, total for assembly
2742 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2743 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2744 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2745 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2746 seconds).
2747
2748 @node traditional-format
2749 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2750
2751 @kindex --traditional-format
2752 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2753 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2754 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2755
2756 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2757 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2758
2759 @node v
2760 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2761
2762 @kindex -v
2763 @kindex -version
2764 @cindex assembler version
2765 @cindex version of assembler
2766 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2767 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2768 command line.
2769
2770 @node W
2771 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2772
2773 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2774 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2775 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2776 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2777
2778 @kindex -W
2779 @kindex --no-warn
2780 @cindex suppressing warnings
2781 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2782 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2783 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2784 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2785 are still reported.
2786
2787 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2788 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2789 @cindex warnings, causing error
2790 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2791 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2792
2793 @kindex --warn
2794 @cindex warnings, switching on
2795 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2796 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2797
2798 @node Z
2799 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2800 @cindex object file, after errors
2801 @cindex errors, continuing after
2802 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2803 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2804 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2805 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2806 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2807 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2808
2809 @node Syntax
2810 @chapter Syntax
2811
2812 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2813 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2814 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2815 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2816 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2817 @ifclear VAX
2818 assembler.
2819 @end ifclear
2820 @ifset VAX
2821 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2822 @end ifset
2823
2824 @menu
2825 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2826 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2827 * Comments:: Comments
2828 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2829 * Statements:: Statements
2830 * Constants:: Constants
2831 @end menu
2832
2833 @node Preprocessing
2834 @section Preprocessing
2835
2836 @cindex preprocessing
2837 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2838 @itemize @bullet
2839 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2840 @item
2841 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2842 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2843 a single space.
2844
2845 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2846 @item
2847 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2848 appropriate number of newlines.
2849
2850 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2851 @item
2852 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2853 @end itemize
2854
2855 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2856 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2857 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2858 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2859 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2860 @samp{.S} suffix. @url{https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Overall-Options.html#Overall-Options,
2861 See the 'Options Controlling the Kind of Output' section of the GCC manual for
2862 more details}
2863
2864 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2865 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2866 preprocessed.
2867
2868 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2869 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2870 @kindex #NO_APP
2871 @kindex #APP
2872 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2873 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2874 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2875 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2876 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2877 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2878 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2879 and whitespace.
2880
2881 @node Whitespace
2882 @section Whitespace
2883
2884 @cindex whitespace
2885 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2886 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2887 people to read. Unless within character constants
2888 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2889 as exactly one space.
2890
2891 @node Comments
2892 @section Comments
2893
2894 @cindex comments
2895 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2896 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2897
2898 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2899 This means you may not nest these comments.
2900
2901 @smallexample
2902 /*
2903 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2904 is to use this sort of comment.
2905 */
2906
2907 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2908 @end smallexample
2909
2910 @cindex line comment character
2911 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2912 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2913 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2914 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2915 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2916 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2917 upon command-line options that have been used. For more details see the
2918 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2919
2920 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2921 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2922 to specify logical line numbers:
2923
2924 @kindex #
2925 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2926 @cindex logical line numbers
2927 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2928 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2929 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2930 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2931 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2932
2933 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2934 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2935
2936 @smallexample
2937 # This is an ordinary comment.
2938 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2939 # This is logical line # 36.
2940 @end smallexample
2941 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2942 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2943
2944 @node Symbol Intro
2945 @section Symbols
2946
2947 @cindex characters used in symbols
2948 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2949 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2950 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2951 @samp{_.$}.
2952 @end ifclear
2953 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2954 @ifclear GENERIC
2955 @ifset H8
2956 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2957 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2958 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2959 symbol names.)
2960 @end ifset
2961 @end ifclear
2962 @end ifset
2963 @ifset GENERIC
2964 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2965 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2966 @end ifset
2967 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2968 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2969 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2970 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2971 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2972
2973 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2974 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2975 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceded by a
2976 backslash @code{\} character.
2977 @cindex length of symbols
2978
2979 @node Statements
2980 @section Statements
2981
2982 @cindex statements, structure of
2983 @cindex line separator character
2984 @cindex statement separator character
2985
2986 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2987 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2988 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2989 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2990 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2991 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2992 exception: they do not end statements.
2993
2994 @cindex newline, required at file end
2995 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2996 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2997 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2998
2999 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
3000
3001 @cindex instructions and directives
3002 @cindex directives and instructions
3003 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
3004 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
3005 @c 13feb91.
3006 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
3007 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
3008 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
3009 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
3010 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
3011 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
3012 assembles into a machine language instruction.
3013 @ifset GENERIC
3014 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
3015 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
3016 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
3017 language.@refill
3018 @end ifset
3019
3020 @cindex @code{:} (label)
3021 @cindex label (@code{:})
3022 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
3023 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
3024 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
3025
3026 @ifset HPPA
3027 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
3028 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
3029 only one label may be defined on each line.
3030 @end ifset
3031
3032 @smallexample
3033 label: .directive followed by something
3034 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
3035 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
3036 @end smallexample
3037
3038 @node Constants
3039 @section Constants
3040
3041 @cindex constants
3042 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
3043 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
3044 @smallexample
3045 @group
3046 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
3047 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
3048 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
3049 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
3050 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
3051 @end group
3052 @end smallexample
3053
3054 @menu
3055 * Characters:: Character Constants
3056 * Numbers:: Number Constants
3057 @end menu
3058
3059 @node Characters
3060 @subsection Character Constants
3061
3062 @cindex character constants
3063 @cindex constants, character
3064 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
3065 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
3066 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
3067 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
3068 used in arithmetic expressions.
3069
3070 @menu
3071 * Strings:: Strings
3072 * Chars:: Characters
3073 @end menu
3074
3075 @node Strings
3076 @subsubsection Strings
3077
3078 @cindex string constants
3079 @cindex constants, string
3080 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
3081 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
3082 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
3083 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
3084 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
3085 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
3086 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
3087 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
3088
3089 @cindex escape codes, character
3090 @cindex character escape codes
3091 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
3092 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
3093 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
3094 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
3095 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
3096 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
3097 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
3098 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
3099 @table @kbd
3100 @c @item \a
3101 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
3102 @c
3103 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
3104 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
3105 @item \b
3106 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
3107
3108 @c @item \e
3109 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
3110 @c
3111 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
3112 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
3113 @item backslash-f
3114 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
3115
3116 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
3117 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
3118 @item \n
3119 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
3120
3121 @c @item \p
3122 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
3123 @c
3124 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3125 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3126 @item \r
3127 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3128
3129 @c @item \s
3130 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3131 @c other assemblers.
3132 @c
3133 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3134 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
3135 @item \t
3136 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3137
3138 @c @item \v
3139 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3140 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3141 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3142 @c
3143 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3144 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3145 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3146 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3147 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3148 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3149
3150 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3151 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3152 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3153 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3154 lower case @code{x} works.
3155
3156 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3157 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3158 @item \\
3159 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3160
3161 @c @item \'
3162 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3163 @c This is needed in single character literals
3164 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3165 @c a @samp{'}.
3166 @c
3167 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3168 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3169 @item \"
3170 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3171 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3172
3173 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3174 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3175 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3176 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3177 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3178 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3179 code and warns you of the fact.
3180 @end table
3181
3182 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3183 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3184 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3185 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3186 sequence.
3187
3188 @node Chars
3189 @subsubsection Characters
3190
3191 @cindex single character constant
3192 @cindex character, single
3193 @cindex constant, single character
3194 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3195 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3196 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3197 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3198 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3199 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3200 accent. A newline
3201 @ifclear GENERIC
3202 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3203 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3204 @end ifclear
3205 @ifset abnormal-separator
3206 @ifset H8
3207 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3208 Renesas SH)
3209 @end ifset
3210 @end ifset
3211 @end ifclear
3212 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3213 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3214 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3215 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3216 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3217
3218 @node Numbers
3219 @subsection Number Constants
3220
3221 @cindex constants, number
3222 @cindex number constants
3223 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3224 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3225 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3226 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3227 are floating point numbers, described below.
3228
3229 @menu
3230 * Integers:: Integers
3231 * Bignums:: Bignums
3232 * Flonums:: Flonums
3233 @ifclear GENERIC
3234 @end ifclear
3235 @end menu
3236
3237 @node Integers
3238 @subsubsection Integers
3239 @cindex integers
3240 @cindex constants, integer
3241
3242 @cindex binary integers
3243 @cindex integers, binary
3244 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3245 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3246
3247 @cindex octal integers
3248 @cindex integers, octal
3249 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3250 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3251
3252 @cindex decimal integers
3253 @cindex integers, decimal
3254 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3255 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3256
3257 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3258 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3259 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3260 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3261
3262 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3263 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3264 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3265
3266 @node Bignums
3267 @subsubsection Bignums
3268
3269 @cindex bignums
3270 @cindex constants, bignum
3271 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3272 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3273 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3274 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3275
3276 @node Flonums
3277 @subsubsection Flonums
3278 @cindex flonums
3279 @cindex floating point numbers
3280 @cindex constants, floating point
3281
3282 @cindex precision, floating point
3283 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3284 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3285 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3286 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3287 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3288 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3289
3290 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3291 @itemize @bullet
3292 @item
3293 The digit @samp{0}.
3294 @ifset HPPA
3295 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3296 @end ifset
3297
3298 @item
3299 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3300 @ifset GENERIC
3301 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3302 @ignore
3303 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3304 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3305 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3306 @end ignore
3307
3308 On the H8/300 and Renesas / SuperH SH architectures, the letter must be
3309 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3310
3311 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3312 (in upper or lower case).
3313
3314 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3315 @end ifset
3316 @ifclear GENERIC
3317 @ifset ARC
3318 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3319 @end ifset
3320 @ifset H8
3321 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3322 @end ifset
3323 @ifset HPPA
3324 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3325 @end ifset
3326 @end ifclear
3327
3328 @item
3329 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3330
3331 @item
3332 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3333
3334 @item
3335 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3336 or more decimal digits.
3337
3338 @item
3339 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3340
3341 @itemize @bullet
3342 @item
3343 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3344 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3345 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3346 @item
3347 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3348 @item
3349 One or more decimal digits.
3350 @end itemize
3351
3352 @end itemize
3353
3354 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3355 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3356
3357 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3358 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3359 @command{@value{AS}}.
3360
3361 @node Sections
3362 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3363 @cindex sections
3364 @cindex relocation
3365
3366 @menu
3367 * Secs Background:: Background
3368 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3369 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3370 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3371 * bss:: bss Section
3372 @end menu
3373
3374 @node Secs Background
3375 @section Background
3376
3377 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3378 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3379 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3380
3381 @cindex linker, and assembler
3382 @cindex assembler, and linker
3383 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3384 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3385 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3386 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3387 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3388 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3389 sections.
3390
3391 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3392 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3393 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3394 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3395 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3396 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3397 the proper run-time addresses.
3398 @ifset H8
3399 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3400 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3401 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3402 @end ifset
3403
3404 @cindex standard assembler sections
3405 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3406 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3407 @dfn{bss} sections.
3408
3409 @ifset COFF-ELF
3410 @ifset GENERIC
3411 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3412 @end ifset
3413 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3414 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3415 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3416 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3417 @end ifset
3418
3419 @ifset HPPA
3420 @ifset GENERIC
3421 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3422 @end ifset
3423 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3424 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3425 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3426 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3427 assembler directives.
3428
3429 @ifset SOM
3430 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3431 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3432 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3433 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3434 @end ifset
3435 @end ifset
3436
3437 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3438 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3439
3440 @ifset HPPA
3441 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3442 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3443 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3444 @end ifset
3445
3446 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3447 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3448 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3449 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3450 file is mentioned:
3451 @itemize @bullet
3452 @item
3453 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3454 an address?
3455 @item
3456 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3457 @item
3458 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3459 @display
3460 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3461 @end display
3462 @item
3463 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3464 @end itemize
3465
3466 @cindex addresses, format of
3467 @cindex section-relative addressing
3468 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3469 @display
3470 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3471 @end display
3472 @noindent
3473 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3474 nature.
3475 @ifset SOM
3476 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3477 symbol-relative instead.)
3478 @end ifset
3479
3480 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3481 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3482
3483 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3484 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3485 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3486 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3487 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3488 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3489 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3490 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3491 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3492
3493 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3494 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3495 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3496 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3497 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3498 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3499 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3500
3501 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3502 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3503 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3504 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3505 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3506 data and bss sections.
3507
3508 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3509 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3510
3511 @node Ld Sections
3512 @section Linker Sections
3513 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3514
3515 @table @strong
3516
3517 @ifset COFF-ELF
3518 @cindex named sections
3519 @cindex sections, named
3520 @item named sections
3521 @end ifset
3522 @ifset aout
3523 @cindex text section
3524 @cindex data section
3525 @itemx text section
3526 @itemx data section
3527 @end ifset
3528 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3529 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3530 true of another.
3531 @c @ifset aout
3532 When the program is running, however, it is
3533 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3534 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3535 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3536 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3537 in the data section.
3538 @c @end ifset
3539
3540 @cindex bss section
3541 @item bss section
3542 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3543 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3544 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3545 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3546 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3547 those explicit zeros from object files.
3548
3549 @cindex absolute section
3550 @item absolute section
3551 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3552 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3553 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3554 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3555
3556 @cindex undefined section
3557 @item undefined section
3558 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3559 the preceding sections.
3560 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3561 @end table
3562
3563 @cindex relocation example
3564 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3565 @ifset COFF-ELF
3566 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3567 @end ifset
3568 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3569
3570 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3571 @ifnottex
3572 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3573 @smallexample
3574 +-----+----+--+
3575 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3576 +-----+----+--+
3577
3578 text data bss
3579 seg. seg. seg.
3580
3581 +---+---+---+
3582 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3583 +---+---+---+
3584
3585 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3586 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3587 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3588
3589 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3590 @end smallexample
3591 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3592 @end ifnottex
3593 @need 5000
3594 @tex
3595 \bigskip
3596 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3597 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3598 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3599
3600 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3601 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3602 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3603
3604 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3605 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3606 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3607 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3608 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3609
3610 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3611 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3612
3613 @end tex
3614 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3615
3616 @node As Sections
3617 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3618
3619 @cindex internal assembler sections
3620 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3621 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3622 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3623 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3624 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3625 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3626 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3627 section-relative address.
3628
3629 @table @b
3630 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3631 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3632 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3633 bug in the assembler.
3634
3635 @cindex expr (internal section)
3636 @item expr section
3637 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3638 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3639 it in the expr section.
3640 @c FIXME item debug
3641 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3642 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3643 @c FIXME item register
3644 @end table
3645
3646 @node Sub-Sections
3647 @section Sub-Sections
3648
3649 @cindex numbered subsections
3650 @cindex grouping data
3651 @ifset aout
3652 Assembled bytes
3653 @ifset COFF-ELF
3654 conventionally
3655 @end ifset
3656 fall into two sections: text and data.
3657 @end ifset
3658 You may have separate groups of
3659 @ifset GENERIC
3660 data in named sections
3661 @end ifset
3662 @ifclear GENERIC
3663 @ifclear aout
3664 data in named sections
3665 @end ifclear
3666 @ifset aout
3667 text or data
3668 @end ifset
3669 @end ifclear
3670 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3671 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3672 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3673 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3674 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3675 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3676 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3677 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3678 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3679 constants being output.
3680
3681 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3682 goes in subsection number zero.
3683
3684 @ifset GENERIC
3685 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3686 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3687 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3688 @end ifset
3689 @ifclear GENERIC
3690 @ifset H8
3691 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3692 boundary (two bytes).
3693 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3694 @end ifset
3695 @end ifclear
3696
3697 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3698 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3699 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3700 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3701 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3702 data subsections as a data section.
3703
3704 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3705 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3706 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3707 @ifset COFF
3708 @ifset GENERIC
3709 When generating COFF output, you
3710 @end ifset
3711 @ifclear GENERIC
3712 You
3713 @end ifclear
3714 can also use an extra subsection
3715 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3716 @var{expression}}.
3717 @end ifset
3718 @ifset ELF
3719 @ifset GENERIC
3720 When generating ELF output, you
3721 @end ifset
3722 @ifclear GENERIC
3723 You
3724 @end ifclear
3725 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3726 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3727 @end ifset
3728 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3729 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3730 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3731 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3732 @smallexample
3733 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3734 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3735 .text 1
3736 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3737 .data 0
3738 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3739 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3740 .text 0
3741 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3742 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3743 @end smallexample
3744
3745 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3746 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3747 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3748 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3749 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3750 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3751 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3752
3753 @node bss
3754 @section bss Section
3755
3756 @cindex bss section
3757 @cindex common variable storage
3758 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3759 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3760 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3761 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3762 section are zeroed bytes.
3763
3764 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3765 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3766
3767 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3768 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3769
3770 @ifset GENERIC
3771 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3772 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3773 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3774 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3775 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3776 @end ifset
3777
3778 @node Symbols
3779 @chapter Symbols
3780
3781 @cindex symbols
3782 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3783 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3784 to debug.
3785
3786 @quotation
3787 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3788 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3789 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3790 @end quotation
3791
3792 @menu
3793 * Labels:: Labels
3794 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3795 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3796 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3797 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3798 @end menu
3799
3800 @node Labels
3801 @section Labels
3802
3803 @cindex labels
3804 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3805 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3806 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3807 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3808 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3809 definitions.
3810
3811 @ifset HPPA
3812 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3813 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3814 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3815 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3816 @end ifset
3817
3818 @node Setting Symbols
3819 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3820
3821 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3822 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3823 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3824 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3825 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3826 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3827 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3828 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3829
3830 @ifset Blackfin
3831 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3832 @end ifset
3833
3834 @node Symbol Names
3835 @section Symbol Names
3836
3837 @cindex symbol names
3838 @cindex names, symbol
3839 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3840 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3841 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3842 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3843 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3844 particular target machine), and underscores.
3845 @end ifclear
3846 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3847 @ifset H8
3848 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3849 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3850 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3851 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3852 @end ifset
3853 @end ifset
3854
3855 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3856 than @code{Foo}.
3857
3858 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3859 Local Labels. See below.
3860
3861 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3862 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3863 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3864 currently supported.
3865
3866 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3867 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3868 in a program.
3869
3870 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3871
3872 @cindex local symbol names
3873 @cindex symbol names, local
3874 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3875 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3876 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3877 set of local label prefixes.
3878 @ifset HPPA
3879 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3880 @end ifset
3881
3882 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3883 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3884 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3885 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3886
3887 @subheading Local Labels
3888
3889 @cindex local labels
3890 @cindex temporary symbol names
3891 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3892 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3893 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3894 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3895 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3896 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3897 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3898 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3899 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3900 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3901
3902 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3903 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3904 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3905 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3906 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3907 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3908 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3909
3910 Here is an example:
3911
3912 @smallexample
3913 1: branch 1f
3914 2: branch 1b
3915 1: branch 2f
3916 2: branch 1b
3917 @end smallexample
3918
3919 Which is the equivalent of:
3920
3921 @smallexample
3922 label_1: branch label_3
3923 label_2: branch label_1
3924 label_3: branch label_4
3925 label_4: branch label_3
3926 @end smallexample
3927
3928 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3929 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3930 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3931 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3932 these parts:
3933
3934 @table @code
3935 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3936 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3937 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3938 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3939 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3940 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3941 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3942 you may use them in debugging.
3943
3944 @item @var{number}
3945 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3946 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3947
3948 @item @kbd{C-B}
3949 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3950 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3951
3952 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3953 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3954 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3955 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3956 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3957 @end table
3958
3959 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3960 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3961
3962 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3963 @cindex dollar local symbols
3964
3965 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3966 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3967 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3968 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3969 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3970 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3971
3972 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3973 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3974 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3975
3976 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3977 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3978 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3979 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3980
3981 @node Dot
3982 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3983
3984 @cindex dot (symbol)
3985 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3986 @cindex current address
3987 @cindex location counter
3988 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3989 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3990 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3991 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3992 directive.
3993 @ifclear no-space-dir
3994 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3995 @samp{.space 4}.
3996 @end ifclear
3997
3998 @node Symbol Attributes
3999 @section Symbol Attributes
4000
4001 @cindex symbol attributes
4002 @cindex attributes, symbol
4003 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
4004 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
4005 attributes.
4006 @ifset INTERNALS
4007 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
4008 @end ifset
4009
4010 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
4011 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
4012 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
4013 would want.
4014
4015 @menu
4016 * Symbol Value:: Value
4017 * Symbol Type:: Type
4018 @ifset aout
4019 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4020 @end ifset
4021 @ifset COFF
4022 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
4023 @end ifset
4024 @ifset SOM
4025 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
4026 @end ifset
4027 @end menu
4028
4029 @node Symbol Value
4030 @subsection Value
4031
4032 @cindex value of a symbol
4033 @cindex symbol value
4034 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
4035 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
4036 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
4037 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
4038 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
4039 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
4040 called absolute.
4041
4042 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
4043 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
4044 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
4045 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
4046 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
4047 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
4048 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
4049 allocated storage.
4050
4051 @node Symbol Type
4052 @subsection Type
4053
4054 @cindex type of a symbol
4055 @cindex symbol type
4056 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
4057 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
4058 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
4059 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
4060
4061 @ifset aout
4062 @node a.out Symbols
4063 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4064
4065 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4066 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4067
4068 @menu
4069 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4070 * Symbol Other:: Other
4071 @end menu
4072
4073 @node Symbol Desc
4074 @subsubsection Descriptor
4075
4076 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4077 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4078 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4079 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4080 @command{@value{AS}}.
4081
4082 @node Symbol Other
4083 @subsubsection Other
4084
4085 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4086 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4087 @end ifset
4088
4089 @ifset COFF
4090 @node COFF Symbols
4091 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4092
4093 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4094 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4095
4096 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4097 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4098 @code{.endef} directives.
4099
4100 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4101
4102 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4103 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4104 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4105
4106 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4107
4108 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4109 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4110 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4111 table information for COFF.
4112 @end ifset
4113
4114 @ifset SOM
4115 @node SOM Symbols
4116 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4117
4118 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4119 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4120
4121 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4122 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4123
4124 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4125 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4126 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4127 @end ifset
4128
4129 @node Expressions
4130 @chapter Expressions
4131
4132 @cindex expressions
4133 @cindex addresses
4134 @cindex numeric values
4135 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4136 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4137
4138 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4139 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4140 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4141 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4142 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4143 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4144
4145 @menu
4146 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4147 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4148 @end menu
4149
4150 @node Empty Exprs
4151 @section Empty Expressions
4152
4153 @cindex empty expressions
4154 @cindex expressions, empty
4155 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4156 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4157 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4158 is compatible with other assemblers.
4159
4160 @node Integer Exprs
4161 @section Integer Expressions
4162
4163 @cindex integer expressions
4164 @cindex expressions, integer
4165 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4166 by @emph{operators}.
4167
4168 @menu
4169 * Arguments:: Arguments
4170 * Operators:: Operators
4171 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4172 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4173 @end menu
4174
4175 @node Arguments
4176 @subsection Arguments
4177
4178 @cindex expression arguments
4179 @cindex arguments in expressions
4180 @cindex operands in expressions
4181 @cindex arithmetic operands
4182 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4183 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4184 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4185 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4186 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4187 instruction operands.
4188
4189 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4190 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4191 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4192 integer.
4193
4194 Numbers are usually integers.
4195
4196 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4197 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4198 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4199 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4200 assemblers.
4201
4202 @cindex subexpressions
4203 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4204 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4205 operator followed by an argument.
4206
4207 @node Operators
4208 @subsection Operators
4209
4210 @cindex operators, in expressions
4211 @cindex arithmetic functions
4212 @cindex functions, in expressions
4213 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4214 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4215 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4216 whitespace.
4217
4218 @node Prefix Ops
4219 @subsection Prefix Operator
4220
4221 @cindex prefix operators
4222 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4223 one argument, which must be absolute.
4224
4225 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4226 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4227 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4228 @tex
4229 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4230 @end tex
4231
4232 @table @code
4233 @item -
4234 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4235 @item ~
4236 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4237 @end table
4238
4239 @tex
4240 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4241 @end tex
4242
4243 @node Infix Ops
4244 @subsection Infix Operators
4245
4246 @cindex infix operators
4247 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4248 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4249 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4250 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4251 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4252
4253 @enumerate
4254 @cindex operator precedence
4255 @cindex precedence of operators
4256
4257 @item
4258 Highest Precedence
4259
4260 @table @code
4261 @item *
4262 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4263
4264 @item /
4265 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4266
4267 @item %
4268 @dfn{Remainder}.
4269
4270 @item <<
4271 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4272
4273 @item >>
4274 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4275 @end table
4276
4277 @item
4278 Intermediate precedence
4279
4280 @table @code
4281 @item |
4282
4283 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4284
4285 @item &
4286 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4287
4288 @item ^
4289 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4290
4291 @item !
4292 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4293 @end table
4294
4295 @item
4296 Low Precedence
4297
4298 @table @code
4299 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4300 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4301 @cindex arguments for addition
4302 @item +
4303 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4304 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4305 sections.
4306
4307 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4308 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4309 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4310 @item -
4311 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4312 result has the section of the left argument.
4313 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4314 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4315 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4316
4317 @cindex comparison expressions
4318 @cindex expressions, comparison
4319 @item ==
4320 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4321 @item <>
4322 @itemx !=
4323 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4324 @item <
4325 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4326 @item >
4327 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4328 @item >=
4329 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4330 @item <=
4331 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4332
4333 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4334 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4335 perform signed comparisons.
4336 @end table
4337
4338 @item Lowest Precedence
4339
4340 @table @code
4341 @item &&
4342 @dfn{Logical And}.
4343
4344 @item ||
4345 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4346
4347 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4348 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4349 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4350 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4351
4352 @end table
4353 @end enumerate
4354
4355 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4356 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4357
4358 @node Pseudo Ops
4359 @chapter Assembler Directives
4360
4361 @cindex directives, machine independent
4362 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4363 @cindex machine independent directives
4364 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4365 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4366 in lower case.
4367
4368 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4369 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4370 @ifset GENERIC
4371 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4372 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4373 @end ifset
4374 @ifclear GENERIC
4375 @ifset machine-directives
4376 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4377 @end ifset
4378 @end ifclear
4379
4380 @menu
4381 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4382 @ifset COFF
4383 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4384 @end ifset
4385
4386 * Align:: @code{.align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4387 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4388 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4389 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4390 * Attach_to_group:: @code{.attach_to_group @var{name}}
4391 * Balign:: @code{.balign [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]}
4392 * Bss:: @code{.bss @var{subsection}}
4393 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4394 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4395 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4396 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4397 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4398 * Dc:: @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
4399 * Dcb:: @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4400 * Ds:: @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4401 @ifset COFF
4402 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4403 @end ifset
4404 @ifset aout
4405 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4406 @end ifset
4407 @ifset COFF
4408 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4409 @end ifset
4410
4411 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4412 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4413 * Else:: @code{.else}
4414 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4415 * End:: @code{.end}
4416 @ifset COFF
4417 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4418 @end ifset
4419
4420 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4421 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4422 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4423 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4424 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4425 * Err:: @code{.err}
4426 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4427 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4428 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4429 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4430 * File:: @code{.file}
4431 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4432 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4433 * Func:: @code{.func}
4434 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4435 @ifset ELF
4436 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4437 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4438 @end ifset
4439
4440 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4441 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4442 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4443 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4444 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4445 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4446 @ifset ELF
4447 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4448 @end ifset
4449
4450 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4451 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4452 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4453 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4454 @ifclear no-line-dir
4455 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4456 @end ifclear
4457
4458 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4459 * List:: @code{.list}
4460 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4461 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4462 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4463 @ifset ELF
4464 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4465 @end ifset
4466
4467 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4468 @ignore
4469 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4470 @end ignore
4471
4472 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4473 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4474 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4475 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4476 * Nop:: @code{.nop}
4477 * Nops:: @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
4478 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4479 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4480 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4481 * P2align:: @code{.p2align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4482 @ifset ELF
4483 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4484 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4485 @end ifset
4486
4487 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4488 @ifset ELF
4489 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4490 @end ifset
4491
4492 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4493 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4494 @ifset ELF
4495 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4496 @end ifset
4497
4498 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4499 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4500 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4501 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4502 @ifset COFF
4503 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4504 @end ifset
4505 @ifset COFF-ELF
4506 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4507 @end ifset
4508
4509 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4510 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4511 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4512 @ifset COFF-ELF
4513 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4514 @end ifset
4515 @ifclear no-space-dir
4516 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4517 @end ifclear
4518
4519 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4520 @ifclear no-space-dir
4521 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4522 @end ifclear
4523 @ifset have-stabs
4524 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4525 @end ifset
4526
4527 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4528 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4529 @ifset ELF
4530 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4531 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}[,@var{visibility}]}
4532 @end ifset
4533
4534 @ifset COFF
4535 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4536 @end ifset
4537
4538 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4539 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4540 @ifset ELF
4541 * Tls_common:: @code{.tls_common @var{symbol}, @var{length}[, @var{alignment}]}
4542 @end ifset
4543 @ifset COFF-ELF
4544 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4545 @end ifset
4546
4547 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4548 @ifset COFF
4549 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4550 @end ifset
4551
4552 @ifset ELF
4553 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4554 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4555 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4556 @end ifset
4557
4558 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4559 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4560 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4561 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4562 @ifclear no-space-dir
4563 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4564 @end ifclear
4565 * 2byte:: @code{.2byte @var{expressions}}
4566 * 4byte:: @code{.4byte @var{expressions}}
4567 * 8byte:: @code{.8byte @var{bignums}}
4568 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4569 @end menu
4570
4571 @node Abort
4572 @section @code{.abort}
4573
4574 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4575 @cindex stopping the assembly
4576 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4577 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4578 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4579 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4580 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4581
4582 @ifset COFF
4583 @node ABORT (COFF)
4584 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4585
4586 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4587 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4588 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4589
4590 @end ifset
4591
4592 @node Align
4593 @section @code{.align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4594
4595 @cindex padding the location counter
4596 @cindex @code{align} directive
4597 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4598 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4599 required, as described below. If this expression is omitted then a default
4600 value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
4601
4602 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4603 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4604 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4605 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4606 with no-op instructions.
4607
4608 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4609 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4610 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4611 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4612 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4613 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4614 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4615
4616 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4617 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4618 s390, sparc, tic4x and xtensa, the first expression is the
4619 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4620 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4621 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4622 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4623
4624 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4625 strongarm, it is the
4626 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4627 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4628 counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4629 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4630
4631 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4632 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4633 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4634 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4635 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4636
4637 @node Altmacro
4638 @section @code{.altmacro}
4639 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4640
4641 @ftable @code
4642 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4643 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4644 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4645 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4646 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4647 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4648 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4649
4650 @item String delimiters
4651 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4652 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4653
4654 @table @code
4655 @item '@var{string}'
4656 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4657
4658 @item <@var{string}>
4659 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4660 @end table
4661
4662 @item single-character string escape
4663 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4664 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4665 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4666 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4667
4668 @item Expression results as strings
4669 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4670 and use the result as a string.
4671 @end ftable
4672
4673 @node Ascii
4674 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4675
4676 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4677 @cindex string literals
4678 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4679 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4680 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4681
4682 @node Asciz
4683 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4684
4685 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4686 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4687 @cindex null-terminated strings
4688 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4689 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''. Note that
4690 multiple string arguments not separated by commas will be concatenated
4691 together and only one final zero byte will be stored.
4692
4693 @node Attach_to_group
4694 @section @code{.attach_to_group @var{name}}
4695 Attaches the current section to the named group. This is like declaring
4696 the section with the @code{G} attribute, but can be done after the section
4697 has been created. Note if the group section does not exist at the point that
4698 this directive is used then it will be created.
4699
4700 @node Balign
4701 @section @code{.balign[wl] [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4702
4703 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4704 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4705 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4706 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4707 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4708 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4709 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. If the expression is omitted
4710 then a default value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
4711
4712 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4713 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4714 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4715 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4716 with no-op instructions.
4717
4718 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4719 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4720 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4721 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4722 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4723 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4724 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4725
4726 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4727 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4728 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4729 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4730 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4731 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4732 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4733 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4734 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4735 undefined.
4736
4737 @node Bss
4738 @section @code{.bss @var{subsection}}
4739 @cindex @code{bss} directive
4740
4741 @code{.bss} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements
4742 onto the end of the bss section.
4743 @ifset ELF
4744 For ELF based targets an optional @var{subsection} expression (which must
4745 evaluate to a positive integer) can be provided. In this case the statements
4746 are appended to the end of the indicated bss subsection.
4747 @end ifset
4748
4749 @node Bundle directives
4750 @section Bundle directives
4751 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4752 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4753 @cindex bundle
4754 @cindex instruction bundle
4755 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4756 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4757 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4758 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4759 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4760 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4761 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4762
4763 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4764 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4765 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4766 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4767 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4768 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4769 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4770 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4771 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4772 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4773 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4774
4775 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4776 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4777 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4778 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4779 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4780 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4781 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4782 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4783 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4784
4785 @cindex bundle-locked
4786 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4787 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4788 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4789 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4790 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4791 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4792 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4793 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4794 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4795 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4796 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4797 bundle size.
4798
4799 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4800 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4801 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4802 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4803 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4804 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4805
4806 @node Byte
4807 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4808
4809 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4810 @cindex integers, one byte
4811 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4812 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4813
4814 @node CFI directives
4815 @section CFI directives
4816 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4817 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4818 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4819 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4820 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4821 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4822 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4823 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4824
4825 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4826 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4827
4828 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4829 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4830
4831 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4832 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4833 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4834 redefine it will result in an error.
4835
4836 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4837 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4838 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4839 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4840 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4841 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4842
4843 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4844 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4845
4846 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4847 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4848 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4849 unwind entry previously opened by
4850 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4851
4852 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4853 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4854 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4855 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4856 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4857 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4858 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4859 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4860 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4861 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4862 no personality routine.
4863
4864 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4865 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4866 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4867 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4868 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4869 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4870
4871 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4872 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4873 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4874 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4875 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4876 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4877 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4878 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4879
4880 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4881 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4882 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4883 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4884 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4885 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4886 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4887
4888 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4889 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4890 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4891 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4892 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4893 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4894
4895 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4896 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4897 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4898 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4899 by a section directive.
4900
4901 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4902 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4903 @code{.p2align} directive.
4904
4905 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4906 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4907 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4908
4909 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4910 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4911 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4912 remains the same.
4913
4914 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4915 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4916 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4917 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4918 CFA address.
4919
4920 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4921 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4922 value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
4923
4924 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4925 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4926 CFA.
4927
4928 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4929 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4930
4931 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4932 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4933 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4934 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4935 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4936 code it's annotating.
4937
4938 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4939 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4940
4941 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4942 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4943 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4944 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4945
4946 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4947 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4948
4949 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4950 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4951 i.e. no restoration needed.
4952
4953 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4954 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4955 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4956 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4957 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4958 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4959 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4960
4961 @smallexample
4962 je label
4963 popq %rbx
4964 .cfi_restore %rbx
4965 popq %r12
4966 .cfi_restore %r12
4967 popq %rbp
4968 .cfi_restore %rbp
4969 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4970 ret
4971 label:
4972 /* Do something else */
4973 @end smallexample
4974
4975 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4976 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4977 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4978 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4979 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4980 we can write:
4981
4982 @smallexample
4983 je label
4984 popq %rbx
4985 .cfi_remember_state
4986 .cfi_restore %rbx
4987 popq %r12
4988 .cfi_restore %r12
4989 popq %rbp
4990 .cfi_restore %rbp
4991 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4992 ret
4993 label:
4994 .cfi_restore_state
4995 /* Do something else */
4996 @end smallexample
4997
4998 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4999 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
5000 @code{.cfi} directives.
5001
5002 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
5003 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
5004 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
5005
5006 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
5007 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
5008
5009 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
5010 SPARC register window has been saved.
5011
5012 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
5013 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
5014 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
5015 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
5016
5017 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
5018 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
5019 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
5020 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
5021
5022 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
5023 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
5024 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
5025 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
5026 or another register.
5027
5028 @node Comm
5029 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
5030
5031 @cindex @code{comm} directive
5032 @cindex symbol, common
5033 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
5034 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
5035 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
5036 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
5037 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
5038 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
5039 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
5040 using the largest size.
5041
5042 @ifset COFF-ELF
5043 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
5044 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
5045 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
5046 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
5047 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
5048 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
5049 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
5050 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
5051 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
5052 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
5053 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
5054 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
5055 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
5056 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
5057 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
5058 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
5059 @end ifset
5060
5061 @ifset HPPA
5062 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5063 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5064 @end ifset
5065
5066 @node Data
5067 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5068 @cindex @code{data} directive
5069
5070 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5071 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5072 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5073 to zero.
5074
5075 @node Dc
5076 @section @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
5077 @cindex @code{dc} directive
5078
5079 The @code{.dc} directive expects zero or more @var{expressions} separated by
5080 commas. These expressions are evaluated and their values inserted into the
5081 current section. The size of the emitted value depends upon the suffix to the
5082 @code{.dc} directive:
5083
5084 @table @code
5085 @item @samp{.a}
5086 Emits N-bit values, where N is the size of an address on the target system.
5087 @item @samp{.b}
5088 Emits 8-bit values.
5089 @item @samp{.d}
5090 Emits double precision floating-point values.
5091 @item @samp{.l}
5092 Emits 32-bit values.
5093 @item @samp{.s}
5094 Emits single precision floating-point values.
5095 @item @samp{.w}
5096 Emits 16-bit values.
5097 Note - this is true even on targets where the @code{.word} directive would emit
5098 32-bit values.
5099 @item @samp{.x}
5100 Emits long double precision floating-point values.
5101 @end table
5102
5103 If no suffix is used then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5104
5105 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
5106 point values.
5107
5108 @node Dcb
5109 @section @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
5110 @cindex @code{dcb} directive
5111 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
5112 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
5113 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
5114 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
5115
5116 @table @code
5117 @item @samp{.b}
5118 Emits single byte values.
5119 @item @samp{.d}
5120 Emits double-precision floating point values.
5121 @item @samp{.l}
5122 Emits 4-byte values.
5123 @item @samp{.s}
5124 Emits single-precision floating point values.
5125 @item @samp{.w}
5126 Emits 2-byte values.
5127 @item @samp{.x}
5128 Emits long double-precision floating point values.
5129 @end table
5130
5131 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5132
5133 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
5134 point values.
5135
5136 @node Ds
5137 @section @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
5138 @cindex @code{ds} directive
5139 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
5140 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
5141 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
5142 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
5143
5144 @table @code
5145 @item @samp{.b}
5146 Emits single byte values.
5147 @item @samp{.d}
5148 Emits 8-byte values.
5149 @item @samp{.l}
5150 Emits 4-byte values.
5151 @item @samp{.p}
5152 Emits values with size matching packed-decimal floating-point ones.
5153 @item @samp{.s}
5154 Emits 4-byte values.
5155 @item @samp{.w}
5156 Emits 2-byte values.
5157 @item @samp{.x}
5158 Emits values with size matching long double precision floating-point ones.
5159 @end table
5160
5161 Note - unlike the @code{.dcb} directive the @samp{.d}, @samp{.s} and @samp{.x}
5162 suffixes do not indicate that floating-point values are to be inserted.
5163
5164 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5165
5166 The byte ordering is target dependent.
5167
5168
5169 @ifset COFF
5170 @node Def
5171 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
5172
5173 @cindex @code{def} directive
5174 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5175 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
5176 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5177 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5178 @end ifset
5179
5180 @ifset aout
5181 @node Desc
5182 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5183
5184 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5185 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5186 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5187 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5188 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5189
5190 @ifset COFF
5191 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5192 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5193 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5194 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5195 @end ifset
5196 @end ifset
5197
5198 @ifset COFF
5199 @node Dim
5200 @section @code{.dim}
5201
5202 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5203 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5204 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5205 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5206 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5207 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5208 @end ifset
5209
5210 @node Double
5211 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5212
5213 @cindex @code{double} directive
5214 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5215 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5216 assembles floating point numbers.
5217 @ifset GENERIC
5218 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5219 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5220 @end ifset
5221 @ifclear GENERIC
5222 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5223 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5224 in @sc{ieee} format.
5225 @end ifset
5226 @end ifclear
5227
5228 @node Eject
5229 @section @code{.eject}
5230
5231 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5232 @cindex new page, in listings
5233 @cindex page, in listings
5234 @cindex listing control: new page
5235 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5236
5237 @node Else
5238 @section @code{.else}
5239
5240 @cindex @code{else} directive
5241 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5242 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5243 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5244 was false.
5245
5246 @node Elseif
5247 @section @code{.elseif}
5248
5249 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5250 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5251 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5252 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5253
5254 @node End
5255 @section @code{.end}
5256
5257 @cindex @code{end} directive
5258 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5259 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5260
5261 @ifset COFF
5262 @node Endef
5263 @section @code{.endef}
5264
5265 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5266 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5267 @code{.def}.
5268 @end ifset
5269
5270 @node Endfunc
5271 @section @code{.endfunc}
5272 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5273 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5274
5275 @node Endif
5276 @section @code{.endif}
5277
5278 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5279 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5280 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5281 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5282
5283 @node Equ
5284 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5285
5286 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5287 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5288 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5289 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5290 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5291
5292 @ifset HPPA
5293 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5294 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5295 @end ifset
5296
5297 @ifset Z80
5298 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5299 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5300 On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5301 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5302 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5303 @end ifset
5304
5305 @node Equiv
5306 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5307 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5308 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5309 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5310 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5311 undefined.
5312
5313 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5314 @smallexample
5315 .ifdef SYM
5316 .err
5317 .endif
5318 .equ SYM,VAL
5319 @end smallexample
5320 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5321
5322 @node Eqv
5323 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5324 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5325 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5326 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5327 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5328 value is taken.
5329
5330 @node Err
5331 @section @code{.err}
5332 @cindex @code{err} directive
5333 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5334 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5335 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5336
5337 @node Error
5338 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5339 @cindex error directive
5340
5341 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5342 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5343 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5344 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5345
5346 @smallexample
5347 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5348 @end smallexample
5349
5350 @node Exitm
5351 @section @code{.exitm}
5352 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5353
5354 @node Extern
5355 @section @code{.extern}
5356
5357 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5358 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5359 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5360 all undefined symbols as external.
5361
5362 @node Fail
5363 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5364
5365 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5366 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5367 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5368 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5369 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5370 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5371
5372 @node File
5373 @section @code{.file}
5374 @cindex @code{file} directive
5375
5376 @ifclear no-file-dir
5377 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5378 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5379 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5380
5381 @subheading Default Version
5382
5383 @cindex logical file name
5384 @cindex file name, logical
5385 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5386 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5387
5388 @smallexample
5389 .file @var{string}
5390 @end smallexample
5391
5392 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5393 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5394 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5395 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5396 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5397
5398 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5399 @end ifclear
5400
5401 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5402 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5403
5404 @smallexample
5405 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5406 @end smallexample
5407
5408 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5409 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5410 literal enclosed in double quotes. The @var{filename} can include directory
5411 elements. If it does, then the directory will be added to the directory table
5412 and the basename will be added to the file table.
5413
5414 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5415 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5416 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5417 entries will have.
5418
5419 If DWARF5 support has been enabled via the @option{-gdwarf-5} option then
5420 an extended version of @code{.file} is also allowed:
5421
5422 @smallexample
5423 .file @var{fileno} [@var{dirname}] @var{filename} [md5 @var{value}]
5424 @end smallexample
5425
5426 With this version a separate directory name is allowed, although if this is
5427 used then @var{filename} should not contain any directory component, except
5428 for @var{fileno} equal to 0: in this case, @var{dirname} is expected to be
5429 the current directory and @var{filename} the currently processed file, and
5430 the latter need not be located in the former. In addtion an MD5 hash value
5431 of the contents of @var{filename} can be provided. This will be stored in
5432 the the file table as well, and can be used by tools reading the debug
5433 information to verify that the contents of the source file match the
5434 contents of the compiled file.
5435
5436 @node Fill
5437 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5438
5439 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5440 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5441 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5442 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5443 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5444 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5445 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5446 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5447 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5448 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5449 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5450 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5451 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5452 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5453
5454 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5455 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5456 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5457 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5458
5459 @node Float
5460 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5461
5462 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5463 @cindex @code{float} directive
5464 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5465 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5466 @ifset GENERIC
5467 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5468 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5469 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5470 @end ifset
5471 @ifclear GENERIC
5472 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5473 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5474 in @sc{ieee} format.
5475 @end ifset
5476 @end ifclear
5477
5478 @node Func
5479 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5480 @cindex @code{func} directive
5481 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5482 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5483 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5484 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5485 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5486 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5487 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5488 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5489
5490 @node Global
5491 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5492
5493 @cindex @code{global} directive
5494 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5495 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5496 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5497 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5498 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5499 from another file linked into the same program.
5500
5501 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5502 compatibility with other assemblers.
5503
5504 @ifset HPPA
5505 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5506 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5507 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5508 @end ifset
5509
5510 @ifset ELF
5511 @node Gnu_attribute
5512 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5513 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5514
5515 @node Hidden
5516 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5517
5518 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5519 @cindex visibility
5520 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5521 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5522 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5523
5524 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5525 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5526 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5527 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5528 @end ifset
5529
5530 @node hword
5531 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5532
5533 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5534 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5535 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5536 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5537 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5538 a 16 bit number for each.
5539
5540 @ifset GENERIC
5541 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5542 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5543 @end ifset
5544 @ifclear GENERIC
5545 @ifset W32
5546 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5547 @end ifset
5548 @ifset W16
5549 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5550 @end ifset
5551 @end ifclear
5552
5553 @node Ident
5554 @section @code{.ident}
5555
5556 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5557
5558 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5559 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5560 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5561 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5562 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5563 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5564 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5565
5566 @node If
5567 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5568
5569 @cindex conditional assembly
5570 @cindex @code{if} directive
5571 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5572 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5573 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5574 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5575 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5576 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5577 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5578 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5579
5580 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5581 @table @code
5582 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5583 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5584 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5585 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5586 is considered to be undefined.
5587
5588 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5589 @item .ifb @var{text}
5590 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5591
5592 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5593 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5594 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5595 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5596 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5597 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5598 string comparison is case sensitive.
5599
5600 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5601 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5602 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5603
5604 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5605 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5606 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5607
5608 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5609 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5610 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5611 equal to zero.
5612
5613 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5614 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5615 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5616
5617 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5618 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5619 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5620 to zero.
5621
5622 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5623 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5624 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5625
5626 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5627 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5628 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5629 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5630
5631 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5632 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5633 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5634 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5635
5636 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5637 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5638 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5639 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5640 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5641 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5642 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5643
5644 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5645 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5646 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5647 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5648
5649 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5650 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5651 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5652 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5653 @end table
5654
5655 @node Incbin
5656 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5657
5658 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5659 @cindex binary files, including
5660 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5661 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5662 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5663 around @var{file}.
5664
5665 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5666 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5667 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5668 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5669 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5670
5671 @node Include
5672 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5673
5674 @cindex @code{include} directive
5675 @cindex supporting files, including
5676 @cindex files, including
5677 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5678 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5679 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5680 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5681 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5682 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5683 around @var{file}.
5684
5685 @node Int
5686 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5687
5688 @cindex @code{int} directive
5689 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5690 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5691 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5692 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5693 of target the assembly is for.
5694
5695 @ifclear GENERIC
5696 @ifset H8
5697 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5698 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5699 32-bit integers.
5700 @end ifset
5701 @end ifclear
5702
5703 @ifset ELF
5704 @node Internal
5705 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5706
5707 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5708 @cindex visibility
5709 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5710 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5711 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5712
5713 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5714 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5715 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5716 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5717 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5718 @end ifset
5719
5720 @node Irp
5721 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5722
5723 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5724 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5725 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5726 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5727 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5728 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5729 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5730 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5731
5732 For example, assembling
5733
5734 @example
5735 .irp param,1,2,3
5736 move d\param,sp@@-
5737 .endr
5738 @end example
5739
5740 is equivalent to assembling
5741
5742 @example
5743 move d1,sp@@-
5744 move d2,sp@@-
5745 move d3,sp@@-
5746 @end example
5747
5748 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5749
5750 @node Irpc
5751 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5752
5753 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5754 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5755 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5756 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5757 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5758 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5759 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5760 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5761
5762 For example, assembling
5763
5764 @example
5765 .irpc param,123
5766 move d\param,sp@@-
5767 .endr
5768 @end example
5769
5770 is equivalent to assembling
5771
5772 @example
5773 move d1,sp@@-
5774 move d2,sp@@-
5775 move d3,sp@@-
5776 @end example
5777
5778 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5779 at @xref{Macro}.
5780
5781 @node Lcomm
5782 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5783
5784 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5785 @cindex local common symbols
5786 @cindex symbols, local common
5787 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5788 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5789 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5790 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5791 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5792 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5793
5794 @ifset GENERIC
5795 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5796 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5797 @end ifset
5798
5799 @ifset HPPA
5800 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5801 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5802 @end ifset
5803
5804 @node Lflags
5805 @section @code{.lflags}
5806
5807 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5808 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5809 assemblers, but ignores it.
5810
5811 @ifclear no-line-dir
5812 @node Line
5813 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5814
5815 @cindex @code{line} directive
5816 @cindex logical line number
5817 @ifset aout
5818 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5819 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5820 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5821 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5822 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5823 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5824 @end ifset
5825
5826 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5827 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5828 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5829 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5830 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5831
5832 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5833 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5834 debugging.
5835 @end ifclear
5836
5837 @node Linkonce
5838 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5839 @cindex COMDAT
5840 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5841 @cindex common sections
5842 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5843 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5844 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5845 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5846 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5847 unique.
5848
5849 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5850 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5851 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5852
5853 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5854 following strings. For example:
5855 @smallexample
5856 .linkonce same_size
5857 @end smallexample
5858 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5859
5860 @table @code
5861 @item discard
5862 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5863
5864 @item one_only
5865 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5866
5867 @item same_size
5868 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5869
5870 @item same_contents
5871 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5872 @end table
5873
5874 @node List
5875 @section @code{.list}
5876
5877 @cindex @code{list} directive
5878 @cindex listing control, turning on
5879 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5880 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5881 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5882 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5883 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5884
5885 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5886 @samp{-a} command-line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5887 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5888
5889 @node Ln
5890 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5891
5892 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5893 @ifclear no-line-dir
5894 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5895 @end ifclear
5896 @ifset no-line-dir
5897 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5898 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5899 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5900 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5901 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5902 @end ifset
5903
5904 @node Loc
5905 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5906 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5907 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5908 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5909 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5910 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5911 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5912 the row is added. It is an error for the input assembly file to generate
5913 a non-empty @code{.debug_line} and also use @code{loc} directives.
5914
5915 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5916
5917 @table @code
5918 @item basic_block
5919 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5920 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5921
5922 @item prologue_end
5923 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5924 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5925
5926 @item epilogue_begin
5927 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5928 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5929
5930 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5931 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5932 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5933 either 0 or 1.
5934
5935 @item isa @var{value}
5936 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5937 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5938
5939 @item discriminator @var{value}
5940 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5941 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5942
5943 @item view @var{value}
5944 This option causes a row to be added to @code{.debug_line} in reference to the
5945 current address (which might not be the same as that of the following assembly
5946 instruction), and to associate @var{value} with the @code{view} register in the
5947 @code{.debug_line} state machine. If @var{value} is a label, both the
5948 @code{view} register and the label are set to the number of prior @code{.loc}
5949 directives at the same program location. If @var{value} is the literal
5950 @code{0}, the @code{view} register is set to zero, and the assembler asserts
5951 that there aren't any prior @code{.loc} directives at the same program
5952 location. If @var{value} is the literal @code{-0}, the assembler arrange for
5953 the @code{view} register to be reset in this row, even if there are prior
5954 @code{.loc} directives at the same program location.
5955
5956 @end table
5957
5958 @node Loc_mark_labels
5959 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5960 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5961 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5962 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5963 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5964 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5965 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5966 this function respectively.
5967
5968 @ifset ELF
5969 @node Local
5970 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5971
5972 @cindex @code{local} directive
5973 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5974 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5975 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5976 they will be created.
5977
5978 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5979 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5980 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5981 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5982 @end ifset
5983
5984 @node Long
5985 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5986
5987 @cindex @code{long} directive
5988 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5989
5990 @ignore
5991 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5992 @c what it really ought to do
5993 @node Lsym
5994 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5995
5996 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5997 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5998 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5999 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
6000 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
6001 the same as the expression value:
6002 @smallexample
6003 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
6004 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
6005 @var{value} = @var{expression}
6006 @end smallexample
6007 @noindent
6008 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
6009 @end ignore
6010
6011 @node Macro
6012 @section @code{.macro}
6013
6014 @cindex macros
6015 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
6016 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
6017 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
6018
6019 @example
6020 .macro sum from=0, to=5
6021 .long \from
6022 .if \to-\from
6023 sum "(\from+1)",\to
6024 .endif
6025 .endm
6026 @end example
6027
6028 @noindent
6029 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
6030
6031 @example
6032 .long 0
6033 .long 1
6034 .long 2
6035 .long 3
6036 .long 4
6037 .long 5
6038 @end example
6039
6040 @ftable @code
6041 @item .macro @var{macname}
6042 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
6043 @cindex @code{macro} directive
6044 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
6045 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
6046 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
6047 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
6048 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
6049 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
6050 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
6051 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
6052 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
6053 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
6054
6055 @table @code
6056 @item .macro comm
6057 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
6058 arguments.
6059
6060 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
6061 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
6062 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
6063 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
6064 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
6065
6066 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
6067 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
6068 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
6069 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
6070 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
6071 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
6072 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
6073 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
6074
6075 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
6076 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
6077 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
6078 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
6079 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
6080
6081 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
6082 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
6083 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
6084
6085 @end table
6086
6087 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
6088 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
6089 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
6090 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
6091 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
6092 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
6093 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
6094 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
6095 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
6096 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
6097 this macro definition:
6098
6099 @example
6100 .macro label l
6101 \l:
6102 .endm
6103 @end example
6104
6105 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
6106 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
6107 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
6108 identifier.
6109
6110 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
6111 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
6112 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
6113 length specifier like this:
6114
6115 @example
6116 .macro opcode base length
6117 \base.\length
6118 .endm
6119 @end example
6120
6121 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
6122 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
6123 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
6124
6125 There are several possible ways around this problem:
6126
6127 @table @code
6128 @item Insert white space
6129 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
6130 solution. eg:
6131
6132 @example
6133 .macro label l
6134 \l :
6135 .endm
6136 @end example
6137
6138 @item Use @samp{\()}
6139 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
6140 the following text. eg:
6141
6142 @example
6143 .macro opcode base length
6144 \base\().\length
6145 .endm
6146 @end example
6147
6148 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
6149 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
6150 used as a separator. eg:
6151
6152 @example
6153 .altmacro
6154 .macro label l
6155 l&:
6156 .endm
6157 @end example
6158 @end table
6159
6160 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
6161 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
6162 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
6163
6164 @item .endm
6165 @cindex @code{endm} directive
6166 Mark the end of a macro definition.
6167
6168 @item .exitm
6169 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
6170 Exit early from the current macro definition.
6171
6172 @cindex number of macros executed
6173 @cindex macros, count executed
6174 @item \@@
6175 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6176 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6177 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6178
6179 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6180 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6181 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6182 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6183 @end ftable
6184
6185 @node MRI
6186 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6187
6188 @cindex @code{mri} directive
6189 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6190 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6191 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6192 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6193 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6194
6195 @node Noaltmacro
6196 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6197 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6198
6199 @node Nolist
6200 @section @code{.nolist}
6201
6202 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6203 @cindex listing control, turning off
6204 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6205 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6206 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6207 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6208 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6209
6210 @node Nop
6211 @section @code{.nop [@var{size}]}
6212
6213 @cindex @code{nop} directive
6214 @cindex filling memory with no-op instructions
6215 This directive emits no-op instructions. It is provided on all architectures,
6216 allowing the creation of architecture neutral tests involving actual code. The
6217 size of the generated instruction is target specific, but if the optional
6218 @var{size} argument is given and resolves to an absolute positive value at that
6219 point in assembly (no forward expressions allowed) then the fewest no-op
6220 instructions are emitted that equal or exceed a total @var{size} in bytes.
6221 @code{.nop} does affect the generation of DWARF debug line information.
6222 Some targets do not support using @code{.nop} with @var{size}.
6223
6224 @node Nops
6225 @section @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
6226
6227 @cindex @code{nops} directive
6228 @cindex filling memory with no-op instructions
6229 This directive emits no-op instructions. It is specific to the Intel 80386 and
6230 AMD x86-64 targets. It takes a @var{size} argument and generates @var{size}
6231 bytes of no-op instructions. @var{size} must be absolute and positive. These
6232 bytes do not affect the generation of DWARF debug line information.
6233
6234 The optional @var{control} argument specifies a size limit for a single no-op
6235 instruction. If not provided then a value of 0 is assumed. The valid values
6236 of @var{control} are between 0 and 4 in 16-bit mode, between 0 and 7 when
6237 tuning for older processors in 32-bit mode, between 0 and 11 in 64-bit mode or
6238 when tuning for newer processors in 32-bit mode. When 0 is used, the no-op
6239 instruction size limit is set to the maximum supported size.
6240
6241 @node Octa
6242 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6243
6244 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on some? Or warn?
6245 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6246 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6247 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6248 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6249 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6250
6251 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6252 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6253
6254 @node Offset
6255 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6256
6257 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6258 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6259 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6260 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6261 directive.
6262
6263 @node Org
6264 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6265
6266 @cindex @code{org} directive
6267 @cindex location counter, advancing
6268 @cindex advancing location counter
6269 @cindex current address, advancing
6270 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6271 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6272 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6273 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6274 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6275 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6276 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6277 is the same as the current subsection.
6278
6279 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6280 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6281 backwards.
6282
6283 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6284 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6285 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6286 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6287 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6288 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6289
6290 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6291 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6292 people's assemblers.
6293
6294 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6295 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6296 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6297 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6298
6299 @node P2align
6300 @section @code{.p2align[wl] [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
6301
6302 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6303 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6304 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6305 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6306 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6307 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6308 counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6309 multiple of 8, no change is needed. If the expression is omitted then a
6310 default value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
6311
6312 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6313 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6314 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
6315 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6316 with no-op instructions.
6317
6318 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6319 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6320 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6321 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6322 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6323 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6324 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6325
6326 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6327 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6328 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6329 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6330 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6331 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6332 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6333 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6334 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6335 undefined.
6336
6337 @ifset ELF
6338 @node PopSection
6339 @section @code{.popsection}
6340
6341 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6342 @cindex Section Stack
6343 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6344 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6345 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6346 (@pxref{Previous}).
6347
6348 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6349 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6350 stack.
6351 @end ifset
6352
6353 @ifset ELF
6354 @node Previous
6355 @section @code{.previous}
6356
6357 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6358 @cindex Section Stack
6359 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6360 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6361 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6362 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6363
6364 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6365 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6366 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6367 subsections). For example:
6368
6369 @smallexample
6370 .section A
6371 .subsection 1
6372 .word 0x1234
6373 .subsection 2
6374 .word 0x5678
6375 .previous
6376 .word 0x9abc
6377 @end smallexample
6378
6379 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6380 section A. Whilst:
6381
6382 @smallexample
6383 .section A
6384 .subsection 1
6385 # Now in section A subsection 1
6386 .word 0x1234
6387 .section B
6388 .subsection 0
6389 # Now in section B subsection 0
6390 .word 0x5678
6391 .subsection 1
6392 # Now in section B subsection 1
6393 .word 0x9abc
6394 .previous
6395 # Now in section B subsection 0
6396 .word 0xdef0
6397 @end smallexample
6398
6399 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6400 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6401
6402 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6403 the top section on the section stack.
6404 @end ifset
6405
6406 @node Print
6407 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6408
6409 @cindex @code{print} directive
6410 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6411 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6412
6413 @ifset ELF
6414 @node Protected
6415 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6416
6417 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6418 @cindex visibility
6419 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6420 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6421
6422 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6423 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6424 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6425 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6426 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6427 this.
6428 @end ifset
6429
6430 @node Psize
6431 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6432
6433 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6434 @cindex listing control: paper size
6435 @cindex paper size, for listings
6436 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6437 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6438
6439 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6440 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6441 default width is 200 columns.
6442
6443 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6444 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6445 @code{.eject}).
6446
6447 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6448 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6449
6450 @node Purgem
6451 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6452
6453 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6454 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6455 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6456
6457 @ifset ELF
6458 @node PushSection
6459 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6460
6461 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6462 @cindex Section Stack
6463 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6464 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6465 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6466 (@pxref{Previous}).
6467
6468 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6469 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6470 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6471 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6472 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6473 @end ifset
6474
6475 @node Quad
6476 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6477
6478 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6479 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6480 each bignum, it emits
6481 @ifclear bignum-16
6482 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6483 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6484 @cindex eight-byte integer
6485 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6486
6487 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6488 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6489 @end ifclear
6490 @ifset bignum-16
6491 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6492 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6493 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6494 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6495 @end ifset
6496
6497 @node Reloc
6498 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6499
6500 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6501 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6502 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6503 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6504 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6505 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6506 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6507 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6508 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6509 section.
6510
6511 @node Rept
6512 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6513
6514 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6515 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6516 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6517
6518 For example, assembling
6519
6520 @example
6521 .rept 3
6522 .long 0
6523 .endr
6524 @end example
6525
6526 is equivalent to assembling
6527
6528 @example
6529 .long 0
6530 .long 0
6531 .long 0
6532 @end example
6533
6534 A count of zero is allowed, but nothing is generated. Negative counts are not
6535 allowed and if encountered will be treated as if they were zero.
6536
6537 @node Sbttl
6538 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6539
6540 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6541 @cindex subtitles for listings
6542 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6543 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6544 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6545
6546 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6547 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6548
6549 @ifset COFF
6550 @node Scl
6551 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6552
6553 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6554 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6555 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6556 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6557 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6558 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6559 symbolic debugging information.
6560 @end ifset
6561
6562 @ifset COFF-ELF
6563 @node Section
6564 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6565
6566 @cindex named section
6567 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6568 named @var{name}.
6569
6570 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6571 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6572 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6573
6574 @ifset COFF
6575 @ifset ELF
6576 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6577 @subheading COFF Version
6578 @end ifset
6579
6580 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6581 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6582 ways:
6583
6584 @smallexample
6585 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6586 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6587 @end smallexample
6588
6589 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6590 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6591
6592 @table @code
6593 @item b
6594 bss section (uninitialized data)
6595 @item n
6596 section is not loaded
6597 @item w
6598 writable section
6599 @item d
6600 data section
6601 @item e
6602 exclude section from linking
6603 @item r
6604 read-only section
6605 @item x
6606 executable section
6607 @item s
6608 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6609 @item a
6610 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6611 @item y
6612 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6613 @item 0-9
6614 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6615 @end table
6616
6617 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6618 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6619 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6620 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6621 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6622
6623 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6624 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6625 @end ifset
6626
6627 @ifset ELF
6628 @ifset COFF
6629 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6630 @subheading ELF Version
6631 @end ifset
6632
6633 @cindex Section Stack
6634 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6635 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6636 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6637 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6638
6639 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6640 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6641
6642 @smallexample
6643 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6644 @end smallexample
6645
6646 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6647 @kindex --sectname-subst
6648 @cindex section name substitution
6649 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6650 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6651 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6652
6653 @smallexample
6654 .macro exception_code
6655 .section %S.exception
6656 [exception code here]
6657 .previous
6658 .endm
6659
6660 .text
6661 [code]
6662 exception_code
6663 [...]
6664
6665 .section .init
6666 [init code]
6667 exception_code
6668 [...]
6669 @end smallexample
6670
6671 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6672 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6673 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
6674 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
6675 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6676 macros just for that purpose.
6677
6678 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6679 combination of the following characters:
6680
6681 @table @code
6682 @item a
6683 section is allocatable
6684 @item d
6685 section is a GNU_MBIND section
6686 @item e
6687 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6688 @item o
6689 section references a symbol defined in another section (the linked-to
6690 section) in the same file.
6691 @item w
6692 section is writable
6693 @item x
6694 section is executable
6695 @item M
6696 section is mergeable
6697 @item S
6698 section contains zero terminated strings
6699 @item G
6700 section is a member of a section group
6701 @item T
6702 section is used for thread-local-storage
6703 @item ?
6704 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6705 @item R
6706 retained section (apply SHF_GNU_RETAIN to prevent linker garbage
6707 collection, GNU ELF extension)
6708 @item @code{<number>}
6709 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6710 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6711 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6712 resulting value.
6713 @item @code{<target specific>}
6714 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6715 @end table
6716
6717 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6718 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6719 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6720 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6721 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6722 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added. Also note that the
6723 @code{.attach_to_group} directive can be used to add a section to a group even
6724 if the section was not originally declared to be part of that group.
6725
6726 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6727
6728 @table @code
6729 @item @@progbits
6730 section contains data
6731 @item @@nobits
6732 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6733 @item @@note
6734 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6735 @item @@init_array
6736 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6737 @item @@fini_array
6738 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6739 @item @@preinit_array
6740 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6741 @item @@@code{<number>}
6742 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6743 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6744 some targets extend this list with their own types
6745 @end table
6746
6747 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6748 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6749
6750 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6751 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6752 @code{%} character.
6753
6754 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6755 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6756 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6757
6758 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6759 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6760
6761 @smallexample
6762 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6763 @end smallexample
6764
6765 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6766 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6767 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6768 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6769 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6770 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6771 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6772 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6773 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6774
6775 If @var{flags} contains the @code{o} flag, then the @var{type} argument
6776 must be present along with an additional field like this:
6777
6778 @smallexample
6779 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"o,@@@var{type},@var{SymbolName}|@var{SectionIndex}
6780 @end smallexample
6781
6782 The @var{SymbolName} field specifies the symbol name which the section
6783 references. Alternatively a numeric @var{SectionIndex} can be provided. This
6784 is not generally a good idea as section indicies are rarely known at assembly
6785 time, but the facility is provided for testing purposes. An index of zero is
6786 allowed. It indicates that the linked-to section has already been discarded.
6787
6788 Note: If both the @var{M} and @var{o} flags are present, then the fields
6789 for the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6790
6791 @smallexample
6792 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"Mo,@@@var{type},@var{entsize},@var{SymbolName}
6793 @end smallexample
6794
6795 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6796 be present along with an additional field like this:
6797
6798 @smallexample
6799 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6800 @end smallexample
6801
6802 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6803 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6804
6805 @table @code
6806 @item comdat
6807 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6808 @item .gnu.linkonce
6809 an alias for comdat
6810 @end table
6811
6812 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6813 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6814
6815 @smallexample
6816 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6817 @end smallexample
6818
6819 If both @code{o} flag and @code{G} flag are present, then the
6820 @var{SymbolName} field for @code{o} comes first, like this:
6821
6822 @smallexample
6823 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"oG,@@@var{type},@var{SymbolName},@var{GroupName}[,@var{linkage}]
6824 @end smallexample
6825
6826 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6827 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6828 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6829 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6830 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6831 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6832
6833 The optional @var{unique,@code{<number>}} argument must come last. It
6834 assigns @var{@code{<number>}} as a unique section ID to distinguish
6835 different sections with the same section name like these:
6836
6837 @smallexample
6838 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}",@@@var{type},@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6839 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"G,@@@var{type},@var{GroupName},[@var{linkage}],@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6840 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"MG,@@@var{type},@var{entsize},@var{GroupName}[,@var{linkage}],@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6841 @end smallexample
6842
6843 The valid values of @var{@code{<number>}} are between 0 and 4294967295.
6844
6845 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6846 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6847 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6848 executable. The section will contain data.
6849
6850 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6851 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6852
6853 @smallexample
6854 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6855 @end smallexample
6856
6857 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6858 separated flags:
6859
6860 @table @code
6861 @item #alloc
6862 section is allocatable
6863 @item #write
6864 section is writable
6865 @item #execinstr
6866 section is executable
6867 @item #exclude
6868 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6869 @item #tls
6870 section is used for thread local storage
6871 @end table
6872
6873 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6874 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6875 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6876 work.
6877 @end ifset
6878 @end ifset
6879
6880 @node Set
6881 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6882
6883 @cindex @code{set} directive
6884 @cindex symbol value, setting
6885 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6886 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6887 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6888 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6889
6890 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6891 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6892 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6893 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6894 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6895 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6896 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6897 different symbols.
6898
6899 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6900 file is the last value stored into it.
6901
6902 @ifset Z80
6903 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use @code{.set} or
6904 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6905 @end ifset
6906
6907 @node Short
6908 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6909
6910 @cindex @code{short} directive
6911 @ifset GENERIC
6912 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6913 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6914
6915 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6916 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6917 @end ifset
6918 @ifclear GENERIC
6919 @ifset W16
6920 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6921 @end ifset
6922 @ifset W32
6923 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6924 a 16 bit number for each.
6925 @end ifset
6926 @end ifclear
6927
6928 @node Single
6929 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6930
6931 @cindex @code{single} directive
6932 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6933 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6934 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6935 @ifset GENERIC
6936 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6937 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6938 @end ifset
6939 @ifclear GENERIC
6940 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6941 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6942 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6943 @end ifset
6944 @end ifclear
6945
6946 @ifset COFF-ELF
6947 @node Size
6948 @section @code{.size}
6949
6950 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6951
6952 @ifset COFF
6953 @ifset ELF
6954 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6955 @subheading COFF Version
6956 @end ifset
6957
6958 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6959 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6960 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6961
6962 @smallexample
6963 .size @var{expression}
6964 @end smallexample
6965
6966 @end ifset
6967
6968 @ifset ELF
6969 @ifset COFF
6970 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6971 @subheading ELF Version
6972 @end ifset
6973
6974 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6975 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6976
6977 @smallexample
6978 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6979 @end smallexample
6980
6981 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6982 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6983 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6984 symbols.
6985 @end ifset
6986 @end ifset
6987
6988 @ifclear no-space-dir
6989 @node Skip
6990 @section @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
6991
6992 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6993 @cindex filling memory
6994 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6995 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6996 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6997 @samp{.space}.
6998 @end ifclear
6999
7000 @node Sleb128
7001 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
7002
7003 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
7004 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
7005 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7006 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
7007
7008 @ifclear no-space-dir
7009 @node Space
7010 @section @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
7011
7012 @cindex @code{space} directive
7013 @cindex filling memory
7014 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
7015 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
7016 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
7017 as @samp{.skip}.
7018
7019 @ifset HPPA
7020 @quotation
7021 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
7022 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
7023 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
7024 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
7025 for a summary.
7026 @end quotation
7027 @end ifset
7028 @end ifclear
7029
7030 @ifset have-stabs
7031 @node Stab
7032 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
7033
7034 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
7035 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
7036 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
7037 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
7038 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
7039 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
7040 Up to five fields are required:
7041
7042 @table @var
7043 @item string
7044 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
7045 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
7046 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
7047 using this field.
7048
7049 @item type
7050 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
7051 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
7052 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
7053
7054 @item other
7055 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
7056 low 8 bits of this expression.
7057
7058 @item desc
7059 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
7060 bits of this expression.
7061
7062 @item value
7063 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
7064 @end table
7065
7066 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
7067 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
7068 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
7069 compatible with earlier assemblers!
7070
7071 @table @code
7072 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
7073 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
7074
7075 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
7076 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
7077 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
7078 strings.
7079
7080 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
7081 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
7082 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
7083 assembled.
7084
7085 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
7086 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
7087 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
7088
7089 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
7090 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
7091 All five fields are specified.
7092 @end table
7093 @end ifset
7094 @c end have-stabs
7095
7096 @node String
7097 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
7098 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
7099
7100 @cindex string, copying to object file
7101 @cindex string8, copying to object file
7102 @cindex string16, copying to object file
7103 @cindex string32, copying to object file
7104 @cindex string64, copying to object file
7105 @cindex @code{string} directive
7106 @cindex @code{string8} directive
7107 @cindex @code{string16} directive
7108 @cindex @code{string32} directive
7109 @cindex @code{string64} directive
7110
7111 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
7112 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
7113 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
7114 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
7115
7116 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
7117 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
7118 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
7119 are stored in target endianness byte order.
7120
7121 Example:
7122 @smallexample
7123 .string32 "BYE"
7124 expands to:
7125 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
7126 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
7127 @end smallexample
7128
7129
7130 @node Struct
7131 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
7132
7133 @cindex @code{struct} directive
7134 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
7135 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
7136 @smallexample
7137 .struct 0
7138 field1:
7139 .struct field1 + 4
7140 field2:
7141 .struct field2 + 4
7142 field3:
7143 @end smallexample
7144 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
7145 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
7146 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
7147 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
7148 before further assembly.
7149
7150 @ifset ELF
7151 @node SubSection
7152 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
7153
7154 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
7155 @cindex Section Stack
7156 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
7157 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
7158 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
7159 (@pxref{Previous}).
7160
7161 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
7162 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
7163 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
7164 @end ifset
7165
7166 @ifset ELF
7167 @node Symver
7168 @section @code{.symver}
7169 @cindex @code{symver} directive
7170 @cindex symbol versioning
7171 @cindex versions of symbols
7172 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
7173 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
7174 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
7175 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
7176 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
7177 shared library.
7178
7179 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
7180 @smallexample
7181 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}[ ,@var{visibility}]
7182 @end smallexample
7183 If the original symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
7184 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
7185 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
7186 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
7187 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
7188 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
7189 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
7190 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
7191 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
7192 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
7193 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
7194 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
7195 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
7196 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override. The optional argument
7197 @var{visibility} updates the visibility of the original symbol. The valid
7198 visibilities are @code{local}, @code{hidden}, and @code{remove}. The
7199 @code{local} visibility makes the original symbol a local symbol
7200 (@pxref{Local}). The @code{hidden} visibility sets the visibility of the
7201 original symbol to @code{hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}). The @code{remove}
7202 visibility removes the original symbol from the symbol table. If visibility
7203 isn't specified, the original symbol is unchanged.
7204
7205 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
7206 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
7207 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
7208 symbol table.
7209
7210 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7211 @smallexample
7212 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
7213 @end smallexample
7214 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
7215 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
7216 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
7217 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
7218
7219 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7220 @smallexample
7221 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
7222 @end smallexample
7223 When @var{name} is not defined within the
7224 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
7225 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
7226 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
7227 @end ifset
7228
7229 @ifset COFF
7230 @node Tag
7231 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
7232
7233 @cindex COFF structure debugging
7234 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
7235 @cindex @code{tag} directive
7236 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
7237 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
7238 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
7239 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
7240 @end ifset
7241
7242 @node Text
7243 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7244
7245 @cindex @code{text} directive
7246 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7247 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7248 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7249 is used.
7250
7251 @node Title
7252 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7253
7254 @cindex @code{title} directive
7255 @cindex listing control: title line
7256 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7257 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7258
7259 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7260 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7261
7262 @ifset ELF
7263 @node Tls_common
7264 @section @code{.tls_common @var{symbol}, @var{length}[, @var{alignment}]}
7265
7266 @cindex @code{tls_common} directive
7267 This directive behaves in the same way as the @code{.comm} directive
7268 (@pxref{Comm}) except that @var{symbol} has type of STT_TLS instead of
7269 STT_OBJECT.
7270 @end ifset
7271
7272 @ifset COFF-ELF
7273 @node Type
7274 @section @code{.type}
7275
7276 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7277
7278 @ifset COFF
7279 @ifset ELF
7280 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7281 @subheading COFF Version
7282 @end ifset
7283
7284 @cindex COFF symbol type
7285 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7286 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7287 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7288 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7289
7290 @smallexample
7291 .type @var{int}
7292 @end smallexample
7293
7294 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7295 entry.
7296
7297 @end ifset
7298
7299 @ifset ELF
7300 @ifset COFF
7301 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7302 @subheading ELF Version
7303 @end ifset
7304
7305 @cindex ELF symbol type
7306 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7307 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7308 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7309
7310 @smallexample
7311 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7312 @end smallexample
7313
7314 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7315 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7316 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7317 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7318
7319 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7320 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7321 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7322 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7323 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7324 assemblers.
7325
7326 The syntaxes supported are:
7327
7328 @smallexample
7329 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7330 .type <name>,#<type>
7331 .type <name>,@@<type>
7332 .type <name>,%<type>
7333 .type <name>,"<type>"
7334 @end smallexample
7335
7336 The types supported are:
7337
7338 @table @gcctabopt
7339 @item STT_FUNC
7340 @itemx function
7341 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7342
7343 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7344 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7345 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7346 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7347
7348 @item STT_OBJECT
7349 @itemx object
7350 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7351
7352 @item STT_TLS
7353 @itemx tls_object
7354 Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
7355
7356 @item STT_COMMON
7357 @itemx common
7358 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7359
7360 @item STT_NOTYPE
7361 @itemx notype
7362 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7363
7364 @item gnu_unique_object
7365 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7366 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7367 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7368 systems).
7369
7370 @end table
7371
7372 Changing between incompatible types other than from/to STT_NOTYPE will
7373 result in a diagnostic. An intermediate change to STT_NOTYPE will silence
7374 this.
7375
7376 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7377
7378 @end ifset
7379 @end ifset
7380
7381 @node Uleb128
7382 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7383
7384 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7385 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7386 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7387 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7388
7389 @ifset COFF
7390 @node Val
7391 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7392
7393 @cindex @code{val} directive
7394 @cindex COFF value attribute
7395 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7396 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7397 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7398 entry.
7399 @end ifset
7400
7401 @ifset ELF
7402 @node Version
7403 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7404
7405 @cindex @code{version} directive
7406 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7407 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7408 @end ifset
7409
7410 @ifset ELF
7411 @node VTableEntry
7412 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7413
7414 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7415 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7416 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7417
7418 @node VTableInherit
7419 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7420
7421 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7422 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7423 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7424 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7425 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7426 @end ifset
7427
7428 @node Warning
7429 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7430 @cindex warning directive
7431 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7432 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7433
7434 @node Weak
7435 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7436
7437 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7438 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7439 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7440
7441 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7442 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7443 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7444
7445 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7446 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7447 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7448
7449 @node Weakref
7450 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7451
7452 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7453 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7454 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7455 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7456 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7457 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7458
7459 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7460 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7461 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7462 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7463 had the references to the alias removed.
7464
7465 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7466 within the assembler.
7467
7468 @node Word
7469 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7470
7471 @cindex @code{word} directive
7472 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7473 separated by commas.
7474 @ifclear GENERIC
7475 @ifset W32
7476 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7477 @end ifset
7478 @ifset W16
7479 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7480 @end ifset
7481 @end ifclear
7482 @ifset GENERIC
7483
7484 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7485 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7486 @end ifset
7487
7488 @c on sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7489 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7490 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7491 @cindex difference tables altered
7492 @cindex altered difference tables
7493 @quotation
7494 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7495 @end quotation
7496
7497 @ifset GENERIC
7498 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7499 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7500 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7501 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7502
7503 @end ifset
7504 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7505 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7506 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7507 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7508 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7509 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7510 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7511 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7512 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7513 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7514 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7515 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7516 @code{sym2}.
7517
7518 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7519 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7520 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7521 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7522 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7523 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7524 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7525
7526 @ifset INTERNALS
7527 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7528 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7529 assembly language programmers.
7530 @end ifset
7531 @end ifset
7532 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7533
7534 @ifclear no-space-dir
7535 @node Zero
7536 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7537
7538 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7539 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7540 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7541 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7542 so it can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7543 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7544 @end ifclear
7545
7546 @node 2byte
7547 @section @code{.2byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7548 @cindex @code{2byte} directive
7549 @cindex two-byte integer
7550 @cindex integer, 2-byte
7551
7552 This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. If there
7553 are no expressions then the directive does nothing. Otherwise each expression
7554 is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output
7555 section, using the endian model of the target. If an expression will not fit
7556 in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two
7557 bytes of the expression's value are used. If an expression cannot be evaluated
7558 at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the
7559 value at link time.
7560
7561 This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the
7562 values. As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be
7563 different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
7564
7565 @node 4byte
7566 @section @code{.4byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7567 @cindex @code{4byte} directive
7568 @cindex four-byte integer
7569 @cindex integer, 4-byte
7570
7571 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte
7572 long values into the output.
7573
7574 @node 8byte
7575 @section @code{.8byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7576 @cindex @code{8byte} directive
7577 @cindex eight-byte integer
7578 @cindex integer, 8-byte
7579
7580 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, eight
7581 byte long bignum values into the output.
7582
7583 @node Deprecated
7584 @section Deprecated Directives
7585
7586 @cindex deprecated directives
7587 @cindex obsolescent directives
7588 One day these directives won't work.
7589 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7590 @table @t
7591 @item .abort
7592 @item .line
7593 @end table
7594
7595 @ifset ELF
7596 @node Object Attributes
7597 @chapter Object Attributes
7598 @cindex object attributes
7599
7600 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7601 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7602 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7603 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7604 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7605 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7606 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7607 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7608 newer generation at run-time.
7609
7610 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7611 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7612 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7613 correctly.
7614
7615 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7616 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7617 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7618 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7619 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7620 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7621
7622 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7623 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7624
7625 @menu
7626 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7627 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7628 @end menu
7629
7630 @node GNU Object Attributes
7631 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7632
7633 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7634 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7635
7636 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7637 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7638 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7639 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7640 architecture-dependent ones.
7641
7642 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7643
7644 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7645
7646 @table @r
7647 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7648 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7649 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7650 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7651 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7652 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7653 @end table
7654
7655 @subsection M680x0 Attributes
7656
7657 @table @r
7658 @item Tag_GNU_M68K_ABI_FP (4)
7659 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7660
7661 @itemize @bullet
7662 @item
7663 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7664 @item
7665 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7666 @item
7667 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7668 @end itemize
7669 @end table
7670
7671 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7672
7673 @table @r
7674 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7675 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7676
7677 @itemize @bullet
7678 @item
7679 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7680 @item
7681 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7682 double-precision FPU.
7683 @item
7684 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7685 @item
7686 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7687 @item
7688 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7689 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7690 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7691 @item
7692 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7693 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7694 general-purpose registers.
7695 @item
7696 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7697 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7698 @item
7699 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7700 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7701 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7702 @end itemize
7703 @end table
7704
7705 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7706
7707 @table @r
7708 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7709 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7710
7711 @itemize @bullet
7712 @item
7713 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7714 @item
7715 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7716 @item
7717 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7718 @item
7719 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7720 @end itemize
7721
7722 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7723 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7724
7725 @itemize @bullet
7726 @item
7727 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7728 @item
7729 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7730 @item
7731 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7732 @item
7733 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7734 @end itemize
7735 @end table
7736
7737 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7738
7739 @table @r
7740 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7741 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7742
7743 @itemize @bullet
7744 @item
7745 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7746 @item
7747 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7748 @item
7749 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7750 @end itemize
7751 @end table
7752
7753 @subsection MSP430 Attributes
7754
7755 @table @r
7756 @item Tag_GNU_MSP430_Data_Region (4)
7757 The data region used by this object file. The value will be:
7758
7759 @itemize @bullet
7760 @item
7761 0 for files not using the large memory model.
7762 @item
7763 1 for files which have been compiled with the condition that all
7764 data is in the lower memory region, i.e. below address 0x10000.
7765 @item
7766 2 for files which allow data to be placed in the full 20-bit memory range.
7767 @end itemize
7768 @end table
7769
7770 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7771 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7772
7773 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7774 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7775 mailing list.
7776
7777 @itemize @bullet
7778 @item
7779 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7780 @item
7781 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7782 @item
7783 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7784 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7785 @item
7786 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7787 @item
7788 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7789 @item
7790 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7791 @end itemize
7792
7793 @end ifset
7794
7795 @ifset GENERIC
7796 @node Machine Dependencies
7797 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7798
7799 @cindex machine dependencies
7800 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7801 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7802 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7803 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7804 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7805 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7806 optimization.
7807
7808 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7809 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7810 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7811
7812 @menu
7813 @ifset AARCH64
7814 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7815 @end ifset
7816 @ifset ALPHA
7817 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7818 @end ifset
7819 @ifset ARC
7820 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7821 @end ifset
7822 @ifset ARM
7823 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7824 @end ifset
7825 @ifset AVR
7826 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7827 @end ifset
7828 @ifset Blackfin
7829 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7830 @end ifset
7831 @ifset BPF
7832 * BPF-Dependent:: BPF Dependent Features
7833 @end ifset
7834 @ifset CR16
7835 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7836 @end ifset
7837 @ifset CRIS
7838 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7839 @end ifset
7840 @ifset CSKY
7841 * C-SKY-Dependent:: C-SKY Dependent Features
7842 @end ifset
7843 @ifset D10V
7844 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7845 @end ifset
7846 @ifset D30V
7847 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7848 @end ifset
7849 @ifset EPIPHANY
7850 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7851 @end ifset
7852 @ifset H8/300
7853 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7854 @end ifset
7855 @ifset HPPA
7856 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7857 @end ifset
7858 @ifset I80386
7859 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7860 @end ifset
7861 @ifset IA64
7862 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7863 @end ifset
7864 @ifset IP2K
7865 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7866 @end ifset
7867 @ifset LOONGARCH
7868 * LoongArch-Dependent:: LoongArch Dependent Features
7869 @end ifset
7870 @ifset LM32
7871 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7872 @end ifset
7873 @ifset M32C
7874 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7875 @end ifset
7876 @ifset M32R
7877 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7878 @end ifset
7879 @ifset M680X0
7880 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7881 @end ifset
7882 @ifset M68HC11
7883 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7884 @end ifset
7885 @ifset S12Z
7886 * S12Z-Dependent:: S12Z Dependent Features
7887 @end ifset
7888 @ifset METAG
7889 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7890 @end ifset
7891 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7892 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7893 @end ifset
7894 @ifset MIPS
7895 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7896 @end ifset
7897 @ifset MMIX
7898 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7899 @end ifset
7900 @ifset MSP430
7901 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7902 @end ifset
7903 @ifset NDS32
7904 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7905 @end ifset
7906 @ifset NIOSII
7907 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7908 @end ifset
7909 @ifset NS32K
7910 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7911 @end ifset
7912 @ifset OPENRISC
7913 * OpenRISC-Dependent:: OpenRISC 1000 Features
7914 @end ifset
7915 @ifset PDP11
7916 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7917 @end ifset
7918 @ifset PJ
7919 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7920 @end ifset
7921 @ifset PPC
7922 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7923 @end ifset
7924 @ifset PRU
7925 * PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7926 @end ifset
7927 @ifset RISCV
7928 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7929 @end ifset
7930 @ifset RL78
7931 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7932 @end ifset
7933 @ifset RX
7934 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7935 @end ifset
7936 @ifset S390
7937 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7938 @end ifset
7939 @ifset SCORE
7940 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7941 @end ifset
7942 @ifset SH
7943 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7944 @end ifset
7945 @ifset SPARC
7946 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7947 @end ifset
7948 @ifset TIC54X
7949 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7950 @end ifset
7951 @ifset TIC6X
7952 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7953 @end ifset
7954 @ifset TILEGX
7955 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7956 @end ifset
7957 @ifset TILEPRO
7958 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7959 @end ifset
7960 @ifset V850
7961 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7962 @end ifset
7963 @ifset VAX
7964 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7965 @end ifset
7966 @ifset VISIUM
7967 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7968 @end ifset
7969 @ifset WASM32
7970 * WebAssembly-Dependent:: WebAssembly Dependent Features
7971 @end ifset
7972 @ifset XGATE
7973 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Dependent Features
7974 @end ifset
7975 @ifset XSTORMY16
7976 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7977 @end ifset
7978 @ifset XTENSA
7979 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7980 @end ifset
7981 @ifset Z80
7982 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7983 @end ifset
7984 @ifset Z8000
7985 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7986 @end ifset
7987 @end menu
7988
7989 @lowersections
7990 @end ifset
7991
7992 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7993 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7994 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7995 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7996 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7997 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7998 @c in both conditional blocks.
7999
8000 @ifset AARCH64
8001 @include c-aarch64.texi
8002 @end ifset
8003
8004 @ifset ALPHA
8005 @include c-alpha.texi
8006 @end ifset
8007
8008 @ifset ARC
8009 @include c-arc.texi
8010 @end ifset
8011
8012 @ifset ARM
8013 @include c-arm.texi
8014 @end ifset
8015
8016 @ifset AVR
8017 @include c-avr.texi
8018 @end ifset
8019
8020 @ifset Blackfin
8021 @include c-bfin.texi
8022 @end ifset
8023
8024 @ifset BPF
8025 @include c-bpf.texi
8026 @end ifset
8027
8028 @ifset CR16
8029 @include c-cr16.texi
8030 @end ifset
8031
8032 @ifset CRIS
8033 @include c-cris.texi
8034 @end ifset
8035
8036 @ifset CSKY
8037 @include c-csky.texi
8038 @end ifset
8039
8040 @ifset Renesas-all
8041 @ifclear GENERIC
8042 @node Machine Dependencies
8043 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
8044
8045 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
8046 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
8047 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
8048 family.
8049
8050 @menu
8051 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
8052 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
8053 @end menu
8054 @lowersections
8055 @end ifclear
8056 @end ifset
8057
8058 @ifset D10V
8059 @include c-d10v.texi
8060 @end ifset
8061
8062 @ifset D30V
8063 @include c-d30v.texi
8064 @end ifset
8065
8066 @ifset EPIPHANY
8067 @include c-epiphany.texi
8068 @end ifset
8069
8070 @ifset H8/300
8071 @include c-h8300.texi
8072 @end ifset
8073
8074 @ifset HPPA
8075 @include c-hppa.texi
8076 @end ifset
8077
8078 @ifset I80386
8079 @include c-i386.texi
8080 @end ifset
8081
8082 @ifset IA64
8083 @include c-ia64.texi
8084 @end ifset
8085
8086 @ifset IP2K
8087 @include c-ip2k.texi
8088 @end ifset
8089
8090 @ifset LM32
8091 @include c-lm32.texi
8092 @end ifset
8093
8094 @ifset LOONGARCH
8095 @include c-loongarch.texi
8096 @end ifset
8097
8098 @ifset M32C
8099 @include c-m32c.texi
8100 @end ifset
8101
8102 @ifset M32R
8103 @include c-m32r.texi
8104 @end ifset
8105
8106 @ifset M680X0
8107 @include c-m68k.texi
8108 @end ifset
8109
8110 @ifset M68HC11
8111 @include c-m68hc11.texi
8112 @end ifset
8113
8114 @ifset S12Z
8115 @include c-s12z.texi
8116 @end ifset
8117
8118 @ifset METAG
8119 @include c-metag.texi
8120 @end ifset
8121
8122 @ifset MICROBLAZE
8123 @include c-microblaze.texi
8124 @end ifset
8125
8126 @ifset MIPS
8127 @include c-mips.texi
8128 @end ifset
8129
8130 @ifset MMIX
8131 @include c-mmix.texi
8132 @end ifset
8133
8134 @ifset MSP430
8135 @include c-msp430.texi
8136 @end ifset
8137
8138 @ifset NDS32
8139 @include c-nds32.texi
8140 @end ifset
8141
8142 @ifset NIOSII
8143 @include c-nios2.texi
8144 @end ifset
8145
8146 @ifset NS32K
8147 @include c-ns32k.texi
8148 @end ifset
8149
8150 @ifset OPENRISC
8151 @include c-or1k.texi
8152 @end ifset
8153
8154 @ifset PDP11
8155 @include c-pdp11.texi
8156 @end ifset
8157
8158 @ifset PJ
8159 @include c-pj.texi
8160 @end ifset
8161
8162 @ifset PPC
8163 @include c-ppc.texi
8164 @end ifset
8165
8166 @ifset PRU
8167 @include c-pru.texi
8168 @end ifset
8169
8170 @ifset RISCV
8171 @include c-riscv.texi
8172 @end ifset
8173
8174 @ifset RL78
8175 @include c-rl78.texi
8176 @end ifset
8177
8178 @ifset RX
8179 @include c-rx.texi
8180 @end ifset
8181
8182 @ifset S390
8183 @include c-s390.texi
8184 @end ifset
8185
8186 @ifset SCORE
8187 @include c-score.texi
8188 @end ifset
8189
8190 @ifset SH
8191 @include c-sh.texi
8192 @end ifset
8193
8194 @ifset SPARC
8195 @include c-sparc.texi
8196 @end ifset
8197
8198 @ifset TIC54X
8199 @include c-tic54x.texi
8200 @end ifset
8201
8202 @ifset TIC6X
8203 @include c-tic6x.texi
8204 @end ifset
8205
8206 @ifset TILEGX
8207 @include c-tilegx.texi
8208 @end ifset
8209
8210 @ifset TILEPRO
8211 @include c-tilepro.texi
8212 @end ifset
8213
8214 @ifset V850
8215 @include c-v850.texi
8216 @end ifset
8217
8218 @ifset VAX
8219 @include c-vax.texi
8220 @end ifset
8221
8222 @ifset VISIUM
8223 @include c-visium.texi
8224 @end ifset
8225
8226 @ifset WASM32
8227 @include c-wasm32.texi
8228 @end ifset
8229
8230 @ifset XGATE
8231 @include c-xgate.texi
8232 @end ifset
8233
8234 @ifset XSTORMY16
8235 @include c-xstormy16.texi
8236 @end ifset
8237
8238 @ifset XTENSA
8239 @include c-xtensa.texi
8240 @end ifset
8241
8242 @ifset Z80
8243 @include c-z80.texi
8244 @end ifset
8245
8246 @ifset Z8000
8247 @include c-z8k.texi
8248 @end ifset
8249
8250 @ifset GENERIC
8251 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
8252 @raisesections
8253 @end ifset
8254
8255 @node Reporting Bugs
8256 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8257 @cindex bugs in assembler
8258 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
8259
8260 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
8261
8262 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
8263 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
8264 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
8265 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
8266
8267 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8268 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8269
8270 @menu
8271 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8272 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8273 @end menu
8274
8275 @node Bug Criteria
8276 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8277 @cindex bug criteria
8278
8279 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8280
8281 @itemize @bullet
8282 @cindex fatal signal
8283 @cindex assembler crash
8284 @cindex crash of assembler
8285 @item
8286 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8287 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
8288
8289 @cindex error on valid input
8290 @item
8291 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8292
8293 @cindex invalid input
8294 @item
8295 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8296 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
8297 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
8298
8299 @item
8300 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
8301 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
8302 @end itemize
8303
8304 @node Bug Reporting
8305 @section How to Report Bugs
8306 @cindex bug reports
8307 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
8308
8309 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
8310 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
8311 contact that organization first.
8312
8313 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8314 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8315 distribution.
8316
8317 @ifset BUGURL
8318 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
8319 to @value{BUGURL}.
8320 @end ifset
8321
8322 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8323 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8324 fact or leave it out, state it!
8325
8326 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
8327 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
8328 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
8329 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
8330 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
8331 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
8332 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
8333 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8334 and the most helpful.
8335
8336 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8337 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8338 that the bug has not been reported previously.
8339
8340 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8341 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8342 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8343 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8344
8345 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8346
8347 @itemize @bullet
8348 @item
8349 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8350 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8351
8352 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8353 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8354
8355 @item
8356 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8357
8358 @item
8359 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8360 version number.
8361
8362 @item
8363 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8364 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8365
8366 @item
8367 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8368 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8369 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8370
8371 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8372 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8373
8374 @item
8375 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8376 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8377 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8378 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8379 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8380 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8381 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8382
8383 @item
8384 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8385 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8386
8387 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8388 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8389 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8390 make a mistake.
8391
8392 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8393 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8394 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8395 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8396 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8397 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8398 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8399 observations.
8400
8401 @item
8402 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8403 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8404 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8405 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8406 by line number.
8407
8408 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8409 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8410 @end itemize
8411
8412 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8413
8414 @itemize @bullet
8415 @item
8416 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8417
8418 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8419 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8420 changes will not affect it.
8421
8422 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8423 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8424 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8425 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8426
8427 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8428 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8429 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8430 less time, and so on.
8431
8432 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8433 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8434
8435 @item
8436 A patch for the bug.
8437
8438 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8439 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8440 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8441 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8442
8443 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8444 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8445 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8446 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8447
8448 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8449 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8450 help us to understand.
8451
8452 @item
8453 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8454
8455 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8456 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8457 @end itemize
8458
8459 @node Acknowledgements
8460 @chapter Acknowledgements
8461
8462 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8463 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8464 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8465 @c (October 2012),
8466 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8467
8468 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8469 more details?}
8470
8471 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8472 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8473 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8474
8475 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8476 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8477 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8478 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8479 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8480 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8481 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8482 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8483 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8484 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8485
8486 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8487 in format-specific I/O modules.
8488
8489 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8490 has done much work with it since.
8491
8492 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8493
8494 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8495
8496 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8497 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8498
8499 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8500 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8501 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8502 support a.out format.
8503
8504 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8505 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8506 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8507 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8508 targets.
8509
8510 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8511 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8512 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8513 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8514 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8515 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8516 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8517
8518 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8519 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8520 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8521 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8522
8523 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8524
8525 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8526
8527 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8528 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8529 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8530 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8531
8532 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8533 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8534 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8535 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8536 and some initial 64-bit support).
8537
8538 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8539
8540 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8541 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8542
8543 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8544 flavors.
8545
8546 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8547 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8548
8549 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8550 configuration enhancements.
8551
8552 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8553
8554 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8555 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8556 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8557 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8558
8559 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8560 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8561 @include fdl.texi
8562
8563 @node AS Index
8564 @unnumbered AS Index
8565
8566 @printindex cp
8567
8568 @bye
8569 @c Local Variables:
8570 @c fill-column: 79
8571 @c End: